Captiva Manual

Introduction ................................. 1-1Keys, Doors and Windows ......... 2-1Seats and Restraints .................. 3-1Storage ....................................... 4-1Instruments and Controls ........... 5-1Lighting ....................................... 6-1Climate Controls ......................... 7-1Driving and Operating ................. 8-1Vehicle Care ............................... 9-1Service and Maintenance ......... 10-1Technical Data .......................... 11-1Customer Information ............... 12-1Index ......................................... 13-1

Contents

Introduction 1-1

Introduction

IntroductionIntroduction .............................. 1-1Using this Manual ..................... 1-1Danger, Warnings, and

Cautions ................................ 1-1Symbols ................................... 1-2

IntroductionThis manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they are op‐tions that you did not purchase or dueto changes subsequent to the printingof this owner manual. Please refer tothe purchase documentation relatingto your specific vehicle to confirmeach of the features found on yourvehicle.Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabetical listof what is in the manual and the pagenumber where it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.Danger indicates a hazard with a highlevel of risk which will result in seriousinjury or death.Warning or Caution indicates a haz‐ard that could result in injury or death.

9 Warning

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or other people.

NoticeThis means there is something thatcould result in property or vehicledamage. This would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.

1-2 Introduction

A circle with a slash through it isa safety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components and la‐bels that use symbols instead of text.Symbols are shown along with thetext describing the operation or infor‐mation relating to a specific compo‐nent, control, message, gauge, or in‐dicator.M : This symbol is shown when youneed to see your owner manual foradditional instructions or information.* : This symbol is shown when youneed to see a service manual for ad‐ditional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicle andwhat they mean. For more informa‐tion on the symbol, refer to the Index.9 = Airbag Readiness Light# = Air Conditioning! = Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ = Brake System Warning Light" = Charging SystemI = Cruise ControlB = Engine Coolant TemperatureO = Exterior Lamps# = Fog Lamps. = Fuel Gauge+ = Fuses3 = Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changerj = LATCH System Child Re‐

straints* = Malfunction Indicator Lamp: = Oil Pressure} = Power> = Safety Belt Remindersd = Traction ControlM = Windshield Washer Fluid

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys ......................................... 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System .................................. 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation ................. 2-2Door Locks ............................... 2-4Power Door Locks .................... 2-4Delayed Locking ....................... 2-4Automatic Door Locks .............. 2-4Lockout Protection ................... 2-5Safety Locks ............................. 2-5

DoorsLiftgate ..................................... 2-6

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security ....................... 2-7Anti-Theft Locking System ....... 2-7Anti-theft Alarm System ........... 2-7Immobilizer Operation .............. 2-8

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors ......................... 2-9Power Mirrors ........................... 2-9

Folding Mirrors (C140) ............. 2-9Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-10Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 2-10

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ......... 2-10Automatic Dimming

Rearview Mirror .................. 2-10

WindowsWindows ................................. 2-11Power Windows ..................... 2-11Sun Visors .............................. 2-12

RoofSunroof ................................... 2-13

Keys and LocksKeys

9 Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or even kil‐led. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. The win‐dows will function with the keys inthe ignition and children could beseriously injured or killed if caughtin the path of a closing window. Donot leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

A key that is part of the Remote Key‐less Entry (RKE) transmitter can beused for the ignition and all locks.

Press the button on the RKE trans‐mitter to extend the key. Press thebutton and the key blade to retract thekey.See your dealer if a new key is nee‐ded.NoticeIf the keys get locked in the vehicle,it may have to be damaged to getthem out. Always carry a spare key.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemChanges or modifications to this sys‐tem by other than an authorized serv‐ice facility could void authorization touse this equipment.If there is a decrease in the RKE op‐erating range:■ Check the distance. The transmitter

may be too far from the vehicle.■ Check the location. Other vehicles

or objects may be blocking the sig‐nal.

■ Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section.

■ If the transmitter is still not workingcorrectly, see your dealer or a quali‐fied technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions will work up to6 m (20 ft) away from the vehicle.There are other conditions which canaffect the performance of the trans‐mitter. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System 3 2-2 .


c (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The hazard warning lamps will flashonce and the anti-theft alarm systemwill be activated. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem 3 2-7 .d (Unlock): Press to unlock alldoors.The hazard warning lamps will flashtwice and the anti-theft alarm systemwill be deactivated. See Anti-theftAlarm System 3 2-7 .

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If a transmit‐ter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased and programmedthrough your dealer. When the re‐placement transmitter is programmedto this vehicle, all remaining transmit‐ters must also be reprogrammed. Anylost or stolen transmitters will no lon‐ger work once the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

9 Warning

Make sure that you dispose of oldbatteries in accordance with envi‐ronmental protection regulationsto help protect the environmentand your health.

NoticeWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on thetransmitter. Static from your bodycould damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw from the backof the transmitter cover and re‐move the cover.

2. Remove the used battery. Avoidletting other components touchthe circuit board.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down toward the base.

4. Close the cover of the transmitterunit and put the unit in the coverof the transmitter.


5. Reassemble the transmittercover.

6. Check the operation of the trans‐mitter with the vehicle.

Door Locks

9 Warning

Unlocked doors can be danger‐ous.■ Passengers, especially chil‐

dren, can easily open the doorsand fall out of a moving vehicle.When a door is locked, the han‐dle will not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of the vehi‐cle in a crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wear safety

belts properly and the doorsshould be locked whenever thevehicle is driven.

■ Young children who get into un‐locked vehicles may be unableto get out. A child can be over‐come by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke. Al‐ways lock the vehicle wheneverleaving it.

■ Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked door whenyou slow down or stop the vehi‐cle. Locking the doors can helpprevent this from happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use the keyfrom the outside or the door lock fromthe inside.

Power Door LocksT : The power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors.

■ Press the right side of the switch tounlock the doors.

■ Remove the ignition key and pressthe left side of the switch to lock allof the doors.

Delayed LockingIf the vehicle is equipped with the de‐layed locking feature, a chime willsound to indicate a door or the liftgateis open when you try to lock the doorswith the power door lock switch. Thedoors will not lock, and the theft-de‐terrent system will not arm until all thedoors are closed and five secondshave passed.

Automatic Door LocksIf the vehicle is equipped with the au‐tomatic door lock feature, the doorsautomatically lock when the shift leveris moved out of the park position orwith vehicle speed.The automatic door lock feature can‐not be disabled.


The doors automatically unlock whenthe shift lever is moved into P (Park)or the key is removed from the igni‐tion.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is equipped with thelockout protection feature, when thepower door lock switch is pressedwith the key in the ignition, and anydoor is open, all the doors lock andthe driver door unlocks. When doorsare closed with the key in the ignition,the horn will sound as a reminder.If the doors are locked with the Re‐mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit‐ter, and the key is in the ignition,a chime sounds and all except thedriver door lock.The lockout protection feature can beoverridden by holding the power doorlock switch for three seconds.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door safetylocks. These prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors from theinside.

Lock Label shown

The rear door safety locks are locatedon the inside edge of each rear door.The rear doors must be open to ac‐cess them. The label showing lockand unlock positions is located nearthe lock.

To set the locks:1. Insert the key into the safety lock

slot and turn it so the slot is in thehorizontal position.

2. Close the door.To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:1. Unlock the door using the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, ifthe vehicle has one, the powerdoor lock switch, or the rear doormanual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.To cancel the rear door safety lock:1. Unlock the door and open it from

the outside.2. Insert the key into the safety lock

slot and turn it so the slot is in thevertical position.


DoorsLiftgate

9 Warning

Exhaust gases can enter the vehi‐cle if it is driven with the liftgate,trunk/hatch open, or with any ob‐jects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:■ Close all of the windows.■ Fully open the air outlets on or

under the instrument panel.■ Adjust the Climate Control sys‐

tem to a setting that brings inonly outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See “Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

■ If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information about car‐bon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 3 8-20.

To lock or unlock the liftgate, pressthe button on the Remote Keyless En‐try (RKE) transmitter twice or pressthe power door lock switch.To open the liftgate, press the touch‐pad on the underside of the liftgatehandle and pull up.To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power

To open the liftgate if the vehicle'sbattery is disconnected or the voltageis low, access the release lever. Re‐move the interior trim cover on the in‐side of the liftgate. Use a tool to pushthe lever on the latch until the liftgatereleases.


Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrent fea‐tures; however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Locking SystemThe vehicle may be equipped witha deadbolt locking feature in additionto the standard door locks.Use either the key or the Remote Key‐less Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock orunlock the doors and operate thedeadbolt.■ Hold the key in the lock position for

a few seconds or quickly turn thekey twice in the lock cylinder to se‐cure the doors with the deadbolt.

■ Press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter once to lock all thedoors. Pressing the button againwithin three seconds will secure thedeadbolt.

When the doors are secured with thedeadbolt, the manual door lock con‐trols will not unlock the doors.

Also, if the theft-deterrent system isarmed, the doors cannot be unlockedusing the power door lock controls.Press the unlock button on the trans‐mitter once to open the deadbolt andunlock the driver door. Pressing thebutton again within three seconds willunlock all the doors.Unlocking the driver door from theoutside with the key disengages thedeadbolt for all doors. However, onlythe driver door will be unlocked.You must unlock the passenger doorsmanually or with the power doorlocks.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have an anti-theftalarm system.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, close all of thewindows and doors and then:■ Press c on the RKE transmitter.■ Or, lock the vehicle using the key in

the driver door.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds.The security light, located next to theclock on the instrument panel, willflash slowly.Pressing c a second time will by‐pass the 30-second delay and imme‐diately arm the system.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system:■ Press d on the RKE transmitter.■ Unlock the driver door with the key.If the door is not opened or the engineis not started within 30 seconds afterdisarming the system, all the doorsare automatically locked and the sys‐tem will rearm.

Turning off the System AlarmIf there is an attempt to open thedoors, liftgate, or hood without firstpressing d on the transmitter or un‐locking the driver door with the key,the system alarm will be activated.The exterior lamps will flash and thehorn will sound for about 30 seconds.


To turn off the system alarm:■ Press c or d on the RKE trans‐

mitter.■ Unlock the driver door with the key.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passive theft-de‐terrent system.The system does not have to be man‐ually armed or disarmed.The vehicle is automatically immobi‐lized when the key is removed fromthe ignition.The system is automatically disarmedwhen the vehicle is started with thecorrect key. The key uses a trans‐ponder that matches an immobilizercontrol unit in the vehicle and auto‐matically disarms the system. Onlythe correct key starts the vehicle. Thevehicle may not start if the key is dam‐aged.

The immobilizer light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes on ifthere is a problem with arming or dis‐arming the theft-deterrent system.See Immobilizer Light 3 5-25.When trying to start the vehicle, theimmobilizer light comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.If the engine does not start and theimmobilizer light stays on, there isa problem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged, tryanother ignition key.If the engine still does not start andthe light continues to stay on with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be damaged. See your dealerwho can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theft-de‐terrent system in the vehicle.


Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors

9 Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before chang‐ing lanes.

Both passenger and driver outsidemirrors are convex shaped. A convexmirror's surface is curved so thatmore can be seen of the road behindthe vehicle.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside power mirrorsare on the driver side instrumentpanel.To adjust:1. Turn the knob to choose the left

(L) or right (R) mirror.2. Adjust each mirror so that the side

and the area behind the vehiclecan be seen.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

The ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.The outside mirrors will work up to10 minutes after the vehicle has beenturned off. If a door is opened whilethe key is in the LOCK position ortaken out of the ignition, the mirror willnot work.

Folding Mirrors (C140)ManualManually fold the outside mirrors in toprevent damage when going throughan automatic car wash. To fold, whilesitting in the vehicle, pull the mirrorstoward the vehicle. Push out, to returnthe mirrors to their original position.


Power

For vehicles with power folding mir‐rors, press the folding mirror button tofold the outside mirrors flat againstthe side of the vehicle.The ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.Power to the folding outside mirrorswill work up to 10 minutes after thevehicle has been turned off. Power tothe folding outside mirrors will turn offif a door is opened while the key is inthe LOCK position or taken out of theignition.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with outside heated mir‐rors:= (Rear Window Defogger): Press toheat the outside rearview mirrors.

Automatic Dimming MirrorIf the vehicle has the automatic dim‐ming mirror, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind you. This featureis controlled by the on and off settingon the inside rearview mirror. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirror3 2-10 for more information.

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorHold the mirror in the center to moveit for a clearer view of behind your ve‐hicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glarefrom the headlamps behind you.Push the tab at the bottom of the mir‐ror forward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror. Auto‐matic dimming reduces the glare fromthe headlamps of the vehicle behindyou. The dimming feature and the in‐dicator light come on each time thevehicle is started.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror. Use a soft towel damp‐ened with water.


Windows

9 Warning

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with the win‐dows closed is dangerous. Theycan be overcome by the extremeheat and suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics are de‐signed to improve fuel economy per‐formance. This may result in a pulsingsound when either rear window isdown and the front windows are up.To reduce the sound, open eithera front window or the sunroof (ifequipped).

Power Windows

9 Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the power win‐dows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. The win‐dows will function and they couldbe seriously injured or killed ifcaught in the path of a closing win‐dow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.When there are children in the rearseat use the window lockout but‐ton to prevent unintentional oper‐ation of the windows.


The window switches for all doors arelocated on the driver door. Each dooralso has a switch.To open or close a window, press orpull up on the switch.The power windows operate whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/AC‐CESSORY.

Express-Down WindowThe driver window switch has an ex‐press-down feature that lowers thewindow without holding the switch.Press the switch part way and thewindow will open a small amount.

Press the switch down all the way andrelease it and the window lowers allthe way.To stop the window while it is lower‐ing, press and release the switch.

Window Lockouto (Window Lockout): The vehicle hasa lockout feature to prevent rear seatpassengers from operating the win‐dows. Press the lockout button, loca‐ted with the power window switches,to turn the feature on and off.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centermount to pivot to the side window, orto extend along the rod, if available.


RoofSunroof

The sunroof switch is located be‐tween the sun visors.To operate the sunroof, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN, or ACC/ACCES‐SORY.A. Open/Close: Slide and release

the switch rearward to expressopen the sunroof. Slide the switchforward or rearward to stop move‐ment.The sunshade opens automati‐cally with the sunroof or can be

manually operated. The sun‐shade cannot be closed with thesunroof open.Slide and hold the switch forwardto close the sunroof. The sun‐shade must be closed manually.

B. Vent Open/Close: Press and holdthe switch to vent the sunroof. Pulland hold the switch to close it. Thesunshade must be manually op‐erated when the sunroof is in thevent position.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. This couldcause an issue with sunroof opera‐tion, noise, or plugging the waterdrainage system. Periodically openthe sunroof and remove any obsta‐cles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof

seal and roof sealing area usinga clean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from the sun‐roof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ....................... 3-2Active Head Restraints ............. 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment ....................... 3-3Power Seat Adjustment ............ 3-4Lumbar Adjustment .................. 3-5Reclining Seatbacks ................. 3-5Heated Front Seats .................. 3-7Folding Seatback ..................... 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats ............................... 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts (All except Aus,

NZ) ...................................... 3-10How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly (RHD) ................... 3-12Lap-Shoulder Belt .................. 3-16Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy ........................... 3-18Lap Belt .................................. 3-19Safety System Check ............. 3-20

Safety Belt Care ..................... 3-20Replacing Safety Belt System

Parts after a Crash .............. 3-20

Airbag SystemAirbag System ........................ 3-21Where Are the Airbags? ......... 3-22When Should an Airbag

Inflate? ................................ 3-24What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? ................................ 3-25How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ............................ 3-25What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? ................... 3-26Airbag On-Off Switch ............. 3-27Servicing the Airbag-

Equipped Vehicle ................ 3-29Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 3-30Airbag System Check ............. 3-30Replacing Airbag System

Parts after a Crash .............. 3-30

Child RestraintsOlder Children ........................ 3-31Infants and Young Children .... 3-33Child Restraint Systems ......... 3-35Where to Put the Restraint ..... 3-37

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) (All OtherMarkets) .............................. 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash ............. 3-42

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) ......................... 3-42

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat without AirbagOff Switch) .......................... 3-43

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat with Airbag OffSwitch) ................................ 3-44

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

Front SeatsThe vehicle's front seats have adjust‐able headrests in the outboard seat‐ing positions.

9 Warning

With headrests that are not instal‐led and adjusted properly, there isa greater chance that occupantswill suffer a neck/spinal injury ina crash. Do not drive until theheadrests for all occupants are in‐stalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the headrest so that the top ofthe headrest is at the same height asthe top of the occupant's head. Thisposition reduces the chance of a neckinjury in a crash.

The height of the headrest can be ad‐justed. Pull the headrest up to raise it.Try to move the headrest to makesure that it is locked in place.To lower the headrest, press the but‐ton, located on the top of the seat‐back, and push the headrest down.Try to move the headrest after thebutton is released to make sure that itis locked in place.On some models, the headrest canbe adjusted forward and rearward. Toadjust the headrest forward, graspthe headrest at the bottom and pullforward to the desired locked posi‐tion. To adjust the headrest rearward,


grasp the headrest at the bottom andpull forward fully until the mechanismreleases and allows the headrest toreturn to the full rear position.The front seat outboard headrests arenot designed to be removed.

Rear SeatsThe vehicle's rear seat has adjustableheadrests in all three seating posi‐tions.

The height of the headrest can be ad‐justed. Pull the headrest up to raise it.Try to move the headrest to makesure that it is locked in place.

To lower the headrest, press the but‐ton, located on the top of the seat‐back, and push the headrest down.Try to move the headrest to makesure that it is locked in place.Rear seat headrests are not designedto be removed.

Active Head RestraintsThe vehicle may have an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions. These automatically tilt for‐ward to reduce the risk of neck injuryif the vehicle is hit from behind.

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment

9 Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a manual driverseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement could star‐tle and confuse you, or make youpush a pedal when you do notwant to. Adjust the driver seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Seat Position


To adjust a manual seat:1. Lift the bar under the front of the

seat cushion to unlock the seat.2. Slide the seat to the desired posi‐

tion and release the bar.3. Try to move the seat back and

forth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown repeatedly to raise or lower thedriver seat.

Power Seat Adjustment

Move the seat forward or rearward bysliding the horizontal control forwardor rearward.

Raise or lower the front or rear part ofthe seat cushion by moving the frontor rear of the control up or down.


Lumbar Adjustment

If available, move the lever forward orrearward to increase or decrease thelumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

9 Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot do theirjob when reclined like this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front ofyou. In a crash, you could go intoit, receiving neck or other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job ei‐ther. In a crash, the belt could goup over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could cause se‐rious internal injuries.For proper protection when the ve‐hicle is in motion, have the seat‐back upright. Then sit well back inthe seat and wear the safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if thevehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

9 Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a manual driverseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement could star‐tle and confuse you, or make youpush a pedal when you do notwant to. Adjust the driver seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.


9 Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could cause in‐jury to the person sitting there. Al‐ways push and pull on the seat‐backs to be sure they are locked.

To recline a manual seatback:1. Lift the lever.2. Move the seatback to the desired

position, and then release thelever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:1. Lift the lever fully without applying

pressure to the seatback, and theseatback will return to the uprightposition.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback, if equip‐ped:■ Tilt the top of the control rearward

to recline.■ Tilt the top of the control forward to

raise.


Heated Front Seats

9 Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, the seatheater may cause burns even atlow temperatures. To reduce therisk of burns, people with sucha condition should use care whenusing the seat heater, especiallyfor long periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat that in‐sulates against heat, such asa blanket, cushion, cover, or simi‐lar item. This may cause the seatheater to overheat. An overheatedseat heater may cause a burn ormay damage the seat.

Seven-Passenger Vehicles

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the center con‐sole. To operate, the engine must berunning.Press L or M to heat the driver or pas‐senger seat. The indicator light on thebutton turns on when this feature ison. Press the button again to turn thisfeature off.The passenger seat may take longerto heat up.

Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

9 Warning

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is not nearan airbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that object to‐ward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Se‐cure objects away from the area inwhich an airbag would inflate. Formore information, see VehicleLoad Limits 3 8-10 and WhereAre the Airbags? 3 3-22 .

9 Warning

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people ina sudden stop or turn, or ina crash. Remove or secure allitems before driving.


To fold the seatback:1. Lower the head restraint com‐

pletely.2. Lift the bar under the front of the

seat cushion to unlock the seat.Slide the seat as far back as it willgo and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked intoplace.

4. Lift the lever and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

5. Continue folding the seatback un‐til it is completely folded.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:1. Raise the seatback and push it

rearward until it re-engages.

9 Warning


2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

The lever is also used to recline theseatback. See Reclining Seatbacks3 3-5 .

Rear SeatsFolding the SeatbackTo fold a seatback:NoticeFolding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause dam‐age to the seat or the safety belts.Always unbuckle the safety beltsand return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rearseat.1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts and

put the front seatback in the up‐right position. See RecliningSeatbacks 3 3-5


2. Lift the lever on the top of the seat‐back and fold the seatback for‐ward.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the otherseatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

9 Warning


9 Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached, ortwisted will not provide the protec‐tion needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriouslyinjured. After raising the rear seat‐back, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are nottwisted.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:1. Lift the seatback up and push it

back into place.2. Push and pull the top of the seat‐

back to be sure it is locked intoposition.

3. Make sure the safety belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatback.

4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the otherseatback, if necessary.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Reclining the SeatbackTo recline the seatback:1. Lift and hold the lever on top of the

seatback.2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and

then release the lever.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other

seatback, if desired.

9 Warning


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:1. Lift and hold the lever on top of the

seatback.2. Pull the seatback forward to the

upright position, and then releasethe lever.



4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the otherseatback, if necessary.

Safety BeltsSafety Belts (All except Aus,NZ)This section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly. Italso describes some things not to dowith safety belts.

9 Warning

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be worn prop‐erly. In a crash, if you or your pas‐senger(s) are not wearing safetybelts, the injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things insidethe vehicle harder or be ejectedfrom the vehicle. You and yourpassenger(s) can be seriously in‐jured or killed. In the same crash,you might not be, if you are buck‐led up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passen‐ger(s) are restrained properly too.

9 Warning

It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside ofa vehicle. In a collision, people rid‐ing in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Donot allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Besure everyone in the vehicle is ina seat and using a safety belt prop‐erly.

This vehicle has indicators as a re‐minder to buckle the safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminders 3 5-14 foradditional information.In most regions, the law requireswearing safety belts. Here is why:You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be a serious one.A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would not sur‐vive. But most crashes are in be‐tween. In many of them, people who


buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without safety belts theycould have been badly hurt or killed.After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, yougo as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose itis just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop the ve‐hicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stoppedby something. In a real vehicle, itcould be the windshield...


or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts?Will I be trapped in the vehicle after

a crash if I am wearing a safetybelt?!You could be — whether you are

wearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted. Andyou can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you are upside down.

?If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safety belts?!Airbags are supplemental systems

only; so they work with safety belts— not instead of them. Whether ornot an airbag is provided, all occu‐pants still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That is truenot only in frontal collisions, but es‐pecially in side and other colli‐sions.

?If I am a good driver, and I neverdrive far from home, why shouldI wear safety belts?!You may be an excellent driver, but

if you are in a crash — even onethat is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Be‐ing a good driver does not protectyou from things beyond your con‐trol, such as bad drivers.Most accidents occur within 40 kmof home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries and deaths oc‐cur at speeds of less than 65 km/h.Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly (RHD)This section is only for people of adultsize.Be aware that there are special thingsto know about safety belts and chil‐dren. And there are different rules forsmaller children and infants. If a childwill be riding in the vehicle, see Older


Children 3 3-31 or Infants andYoung Children 3 3-33. Followthose rules for everyone's protection.It is very important for all occupants tobuckle up. Statistics show that unbel‐ted people are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearingsafety belts.Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle ina crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.First, before you or your passenger(s)wear a safety belt, there is importantinformation you should know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones andyou would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restrainingforces.The shoulder belt locks if there isa sudden stop or crash.

?What is wrong with this?

!The shoulder belt is too loose. Itwill not give as much protectionthis way.

9 Warning

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. Ina crash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increase in‐jury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.



!The lap belt is too loose. It will notgive nearly as much protection thisway.

9 Warning

You can be seriously hurt if the lapbelt is too loose. In a crash, youcould slide under the lap belt andapply force on your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.


!The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

9 Warning

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not onthe pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle the belt into the bucklenearest you.


!The belt is over an armrest.

9 Warning

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest like this.The belt would be much too high.In a crash, you can slide under thebelt. The belt force would then beapplied on the abdomen, not onthe pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Besure the belt goes under the armr‐ests.



!The shoulder belt is worn under thearm. It should be worn over theshoulder at all times.

9 Warning

You can be seriously injured if youwear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body wouldmove too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head andneck injury. Also, the belt wouldapply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoul‐der bones. You could also se‐verely injure internal organs likeyour liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.


!The belt is behind the body.


9 Warning

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you would notbe restrained by the shoulder belt.Your body could move too far for‐ward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. You mightalso slide under the lap belt. Thebelt force would then be appliedright on the abdomen. That couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.


!The belt is twisted across the body.

9 Warning

You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt. In a crash, youwould not have the full width of thebelt to spread impact forces. Ifa belt is twisted, make it straight soit can work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe second row center position whichmay have a lap belt. See Lap Belt3 3-19 for more information.The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder belt prop‐erly.1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is ad‐

justable, so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the In‐dex.


2. Pick up the latch plate and pull thebelt across you. Do not let it gettwisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Thenpull the belt across you moreslowly.If the shoulder portion of a pas‐senger belt is pulled out all theway, the child restraint lockingfeature may be engaged. If thishappens, let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.Position the release button on thebuckle so that the safety belt couldbe quickly unbuckled if neces‐sary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section for instructionson use and important safety infor‐mation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull upon the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety belt throughthe latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position. Slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing whenthe safety belt is not in use. The latchplate should rest on the stitching onthe safety belt, near the guide loop onthe side wall.


Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the safetybelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and outboardfront passenger seating positions.Adjust the height so that the shoulderportion of the belt is centered on theshoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but not fallingoff of the shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

Squeeze the release buttons (A) to‐gether and move the height adjusterup or down to the desired position.After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it up or downwithout squeezing the release but‐tons to make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt PretensionersThe vehicle has safety belt preten‐sioners for the front outboard occu‐pants. Although the safety belt pre‐tensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the safety belt assembly. Theycan help tighten the safety belts dur‐ing a severe frontal crash, and side

and rear impacts if the threshold con‐ditions for pretensioner activation aremet. Pretensioners are not designedto activate in a minor frontal crash.Pretensioners are designed to acti‐vate in a moderate to severe rearcrash.Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably othernew parts for the vehicle's safety beltsystem will need to be replaced. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash 3 3-20 .

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone, in‐cluding pregnant women. Like all oc‐cupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.


A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt ina crash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing them prop‐erly.

Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt. Tolearn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt,see Lap-Shoulder Belt 3 3-16 .The vehicle may have a second rowcenter seating position with a lap belt.The lap belt has no retractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.If you find that the latch plate will notgo fully into the buckle, see if you areusing the correct buckle. Be sure thatthe latch plate clicks when insertedinto the buckle.To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle.


Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts, buck‐les, latch plates, retractors, and an‐chorages are working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts that might keepa safety belt system from doing its job.See your dealer to have it repaired.Torn or frayed safety belts may notprotect you in a crash. They can ripapart under impact forces. If a belt istorn or frayed, get a new one rightaway.Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 3 5-14 for more infor‐mation.Keep safety belts clean and dry. SeeSafety Belt Care 3 3-20.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

9 Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash

9 Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle. A dam‐aged safety belt system may notproperly protect the person usingit, resulting in serious injury oreven death in a crash. To helpmake sure the safety belt systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any nec‐essary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash may havebeen stressed or damaged. See yourdealer to have the safety belt assem‐blies inspected or replaced.New parts and repairs may be neces‐sary even if the safety belt systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been ina crash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 3 5-15 .


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:■ A frontal airbag for the driver.■ A frontal airbag for the outboard

front passenger.The vehicle may have the followingairbags:■ A seat-mounted side impact airbag

for the driver.■ A seat-mounted side impact airbag

for the outboard front passenger.■ A roof-rail airbag for the driver and

the passenger seated directly be‐hind the driver.

■ A roof-rail airbag for the outboardfront passenger and the passengerseated directly behind the outboardfront passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossed inthe trim or on an attached label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the middle part of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the outboardfront passenger.With seat-mounted side impact air‐bags, the word AIRBAG will appearon the side of the seatback closest tothe door.With roof-rail airbags, the word AIR‐BAG will appear along the trim.

9 Warning

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflating air‐bag might force that object towarda person. This could cause severeinjury or even death. Secure ob‐jects away from the area in whichan airbag would inflate. For moreinformation, see Where Are theAirbags? 3 3-22 and VehicleLoad Limits 3 8-10 .

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reduce the

risk of injury from the force of an in‐flating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

9 Warning

You can be severely injured or kil‐led in a crash if you are not wear‐ing your safety belt, even with air‐bags. Airbags are designed towork with safety belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not de‐signed to inflate in every crash. Insome crashes safety belts are theonly restraint. See When Shouldan Airbag Inflate? 3 3-24 .Wearing a safety belt duringa crash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there is anairbag for that person.


9 Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is up against,or very close to any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if sitting on the edge of the seator leaning forward. Safety beltshelp keep you in position beforeand during a crash. Always weara safety belt, even with airbags.The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or side win‐dows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

9 Warning

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults andolder children, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither thevehicle's safety belt system nor itsairbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infantsneed the protection that a child re‐straint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in the ve‐hicle. To read how, see OlderChildren 3 3-31 or Infants andYoung Children 3 3-33 .

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument panel cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electri‐cal system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical prob‐lem. See Airbag Readiness Light3 5-15 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in the mid‐dle of the steering wheel.


The front passenger frontal airbag isin the instrument panel on the pas‐senger side.

Passenger Side Shown, Driver SideSimilar

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver and frontpassenger, they are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Passenger Side Shown, Driver SideSimilar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags forthe driver, front passenger, and sec‐ond row outboard passengers, theyare in the ceiling above the side win‐dows.


9 Warning

If something is between an occu‐pant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that per‐son causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating air‐bag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attachor put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering.Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or window open‐ing. If you do, the path of an inflat‐ing roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the po‐tential for severe injuries mainly to thedriver's or outboard front passenger'shead and chest. However, they areonly designed to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermined deploy‐ment threshold. Deployment thresh‐olds are used to predict how severea crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants.Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling. It de‐pends largely on what you hit, the di‐rection of the impact, and how quicklyyour vehicle slows down.Frontal airbags may inflate at differentcrash speeds. For example:■ If the vehicle hits a stationary ob‐

ject, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

■ If the vehicle hits an object that de‐forms, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits an object that does notdeform.

■ If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags could in‐flate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits a wide object (likea wall).

■ If the vehicle goes into an object atan angle, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than if thevehicle goes straight into the ob‐ject.

Thresholds can also vary with specificvehicle design.Frontal airbags are not intended to in‐flate during vehicle rollovers, rear im‐pacts, or in many side impacts.Always wear your safety belt, evenwith frontal airbags.The vehicle may have seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System 3 3-21 . Seat-moun‐ted side impact and roof-rail airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to


severe side crashes. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts, roll‐overs, or rear impacts. Roof-rail air‐bags are not intended to inflate in roll‐overs or rear impacts. A seat-moun‐ted side impact airbag and roof-railairbags are intended to deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck.In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the dam‐age to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal air‐bags, inflation is determined by whatthe vehicle hits, the angle of the im‐pact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags, deploy‐ment is determined by the locationand severity of the side impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signal trig‐gering a release of gas from the infla‐tor. Gas from the inflator fills the air‐bag causing the bag to break out ofthe cover and deploy. The inflator, theairbag, and related hardware are allpart of the airbag module.Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel and instru‐ment panel. For vehicles with seat-mounted side impact airbags, thereare airbag modules in the side of thefront seatbacks closest to the door.For vehicles with roof-rail airbags,there are airbag modules in the ceil‐ing of the vehicle, near the side win‐dows that have occupant seating po‐sitions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even belted occu‐pants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel. In moderate

to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside ofthe vehicle.Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontal air‐bags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant's up‐per body, stopping the occupant moregradually. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenly overthe occupant's upper body.But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 3 3-24 for more infor‐mation.Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement tosafety belts.


What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate,they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags maystill be at least partially inflated forsome time after they deploy. Somecomponents of the airbag modulemay be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbag modules, seeWhat Makes an Airbag Inflate?3 3-25 .The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Air‐bag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of the wind‐shield or being able to steer the vehi‐cle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

9 Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthmaor other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of thevehicle after an airbag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a win‐dow or a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following anairbag deployment, you shouldseek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on the haz‐ard warning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps, and turn off the hazardwarning flashers by using the controlsfor those features.

9 Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have also dam‐aged important functions in the ve‐hicle, such as the fuel system,brake and steering systems, etc.Even if the vehicle appears to bedrivable after a moderate crash,there may be concealed damagethat could make it difficult to safelyoperate the vehicle.Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough to in‐flate the airbag, windshields are bro‐ken by vehicle deformation. Addi‐tional windshield breakage may alsooccur from the right front passengerairbag.■ Airbags are designed to inflate only

once. After an airbag inflates, youwill need some new parts for theairbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be


there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

■ The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module which re‐cords information after a crash. SeeVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 3 12-1 and Event DataRecorders 3 12-1 .

■ Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has the switchpictured in the following illustration,the vehicle has an airbag on-offswitch that is used to manually turn onor off the front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags,and the roof-rail airbag for the frontpassenger and the passenger sittingdirectly behind the front passenger.

This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in thefront passenger position falls underthe conditions specified in this man‐ual as follows:Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)must ride in the front seat because ofany of the following:■ My vehicle has no rear seat.■ My vehicle has a rear seat too small

to accommodate a rear-facinginfant seat.

■ The infant has a medical conditionwhich, according to the infant'sphysician, makes it necessary for

the infant to ride in the front seat sothat the driver can constantlymonitor the child's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child aged 1 to 12must ride in the front seat because ofany of the following:■ My vehicle has no rear seat.■ Although children aged 1 to 12 ride

in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children aged 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle.

■ The child has a medical conditionwhich, according to the child'sphysician, makes it necessary forthe child to ride in the front seat sothat the driver can constantlymonitor the child's condition.

Medical Condition. A passenger hasa medical condition which, accordingto his or her physician does both ofthe following:■ Causes the passenger airbags to

pose a special risk for thepassenger.


■ Makes the potential harm from thepassenger airbags in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbags andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the dashboard orwindshield in a crash.

9 Warning

If the front passenger airbags areturned off for a person who doesnot fall under the conditions speci‐fied in this manual, that person willnot have the extra protection of theairbags. In a crash, the airbags willnot be able to inflate and help pro‐tect the person sitting there. In ad‐dition, the roof-rail airbag will notbe able to protect the person sit‐ting directly behind the front pas‐senger. Do not turn off the airbagsunless the person sitting in thefront passenger seat falls underthe conditions specified in thismanual.

The airbag on-off switch is on the in‐strument panel end cap, on the pas‐senger side of the vehicle. To turn offthe front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags, and theroof-rail airbag for the front passengerand the passenger sitting directly be‐hind the front passenger, insert anykey or a coin into the switch, push in,and move the switch to the off posi‐tion. The belt pretensioners and alldriver airbag systems will remain ac‐tive.Vehicles equipped with an airbag on-off switch also have a passenger air‐bag status indicator. This indicator is

above the glove box, in the instrumentpanel. See Airbag On-Off Light3 5-15 for additional information.When the airbags are turned off, thepassenger airbag off light, in the pas‐senger airbag status indicator, comeson to let you know the airbags for thefront passenger and passengerseated directly behind the front pas‐senger are off. These airbags remainoff until you turn them back on again.


9 Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. For example,the front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact air‐bags, and the roof-rail airbag forthe front passenger and the pas‐senger sitting directly behind thefront passenger could inflate eventhough the airbag on-off switch isturned off.To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 3 5-15 for more informa‐tion, including important safety in‐formation.

To turn the airbags on again, insertany key or a coin into the switch, pushin, and move the switch to the on po‐sition.The front passenger frontal and seat-mounted airbags, and the roof-rail air‐bag for the front passenger and pas‐senger sitting directly behind the frontpassenger are now enabled, and mayinflate. When the airbags are turnedon, the passenger airbag on light, inthe passenger airbag status indicator,comes on to let you know the airbagsare on. See Airbag On-Off Light3 5-15 for more information.

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several placesaround the vehicle. Your dealer andthe service manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system.

9 Warning

For up to 10 seconds after the ve‐hicle is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are closeto an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are prob‐ably part of the airbag system. Besure to follow proper service pro‐cedures, and make sure the per‐son performing work for you isqualified to do so.


Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle?Is there anything I might add to or

change about the vehicle thatcould keep the airbags from work‐ing properly?!Yes. If you add things that change

the vehicle's frame, bumper sys‐tem, height, front end or side sheetmetal, they may keep the airbagsystem from working properly.Changing or moving any parts ofthe seats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument panel,roof-rail airbag modules, ceilingheadliner or pillar garnish trim,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect the op‐eration of the airbag system.If you have questions, See yourdealer.

?Because I have a disability, I haveto get my vehicle modified. Howcan I find out whether this will af‐fect my airbag system?! If you have questions, see your

dealer.The dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag sensors, sensing and di‐agnostic module and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not need reg‐ularly scheduled maintenance or re‐placement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 3 5-15 for more in‐formation.

NoticeIf an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcovers, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 3 3-22 .See your dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

9 Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not work prop‐erly and may not protect you andyour passenger(s) in a crash, re‐sulting in serious injury or evendeath. To help make sure the air‐bag systems are working properlyafter a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacementsmade as soon as possible.


If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 formore information.

Child RestraintsOlder Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehi‐cle's safety belts.The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat witha lap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the below fit test:

■ Sit all the way back on the seat. Dothe knees bend at the seat edge? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

■ Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on the shoul‐der? If yes, continue. If no, then re‐turn to the booster seat.

■ Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

■ Can proper safety belt fit be main‐tained for the length of the trip? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.


?What is the proper way to wearsafety belts?!An older child should wear a lap-

shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can pro‐vide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to the child'spelvic bones in a crash. It shouldnever be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, chil‐dren and infants are safer when prop‐erly restrained in a child restraint sys‐tem or infant restraint system securedin a rear seating position.In a crash, children who are not buck‐led up can strike other people who arebuckled up, or can be thrown out ofthe vehicle. Older children need touse safety belts properly.

9 Warning

Never do this.Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

9 Warning

Never do this.Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. Ina crash, the child would not be re‐strained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoul‐der belt should go over the shoul‐der and across the chest.


Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protec‐tion! This includes infants and allother children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for every‐one, to use safety restraints.

9 Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave children un‐attended in a vehicle and never al‐low children to play with the safetybelts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older chil‐dren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle's safetybelt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Every time infantsand young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection pro‐vided by appropriate child restraints.Children who are not restrained prop‐erly can strike other people, or can bethrown out of the vehicle.

9 Warning

Never do this.Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is not pos‐sible to hold it during a crash. Forexample, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infantwill suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms.An infant should be secured in anappropriate restraint.


9 Warning

Never do this.Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front seat. Se‐cure a rear-facing child restraint ina rear seat. It is also better to se‐cure a forward-facing child re‐straint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing child re‐straint in the right front seat, al‐ways move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

?What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?!Add-on child restraints, which are

purchased by the vehicle's owner,are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraintshould take into consideration notonly the child's weight, height, andage but also whether or not the re‐straint will be compatible with themotor vehicle in which it will beused.For most basic types of child re‐straints, there are many differentmodels available. When purchas‐ing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor ve‐hicle.The restraint manufacturer's in‐structions that come with the re‐straint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child re‐straint. In addition, there are manykinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.


9 Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This is be‐cause an infant's neck is not fullydeveloped and its head weighs somuch compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant ina rear-facing child restraint settlesinto the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant'sbody, the back and shoulders. In‐fants should always be secured inrear-facing child restraints.

9 Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should. In‐stead, it may settle up around thechild's abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a bodyarea that is unprotected by anybony structure. This alone couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Toreduce the risk of serious or fatalinjuries during a crash, young chil‐dren should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.


(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B) pro‐vides restraint for the child's body withthe harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of the ve‐hicle's safety belt system. A boosterseat can also help a child to see outthe window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

9 Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in the ve‐hicle. Secure the child restraintproperly in the vehicle using thevehicle safety belt or LATCH sys‐tem, following the instructions thatcame with that child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion ofa lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH System)(All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for moreinformation. Children can be endan‐gered in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in the vehicle.


When securing an add-on child re‐straint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important, soif they are not available, obtain a re‐placement copy from the manufac‐turer.Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in a colli‐sion or sudden stop and injure peoplein the vehicle. Be sure to properly se‐cure any child restraint in the vehicle— even when no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

9 Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the child re‐straint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics, chil‐dren and infants are safer when prop‐erly restrained in a child restraint sys‐tem or infant restraint system securedin a rear seating position.We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child rid‐ing in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the air‐bag deploys.

9 Warning

A child in a rear-facing child re‐straint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger airbag in‐flates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflatingairbag. Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat.A child in a forward-facing child re‐straint can be seriously injured orkilled if the outboard front passen‐ger airbag inflates and the passen‐ger seat is in a forward position. Ifyou secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the outboard front pas‐senger seat, always move the pas‐senger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study the in‐structions that came with the child re‐straint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.


Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always make surethe child restraint is properly secured.Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of the childrestraint, you may not be able to ac‐cess adjacent safety belt assembliesor LATCH anchors for additional pas‐sengers or child restraints. Adjacentseating positions should not be usedif the child restraint prevents accessto or interferes with the routing of thesafety belt.Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to secure the child restraintproperly.Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in a colli‐sion or sudden stop and injure peoplein the vehicle. Be sure to properly se‐cure any child restraint in the vehicle— even when no child is in it, or re‐move it from the vehicle.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) (AllOther Markets)The LATCH system holds a child re‐straint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to make in‐stallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installed us‐ing the anchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith that restraint, and also the in‐structions in this manual. When in‐stalling a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either thelower anchors or the safety belts toproperly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be instal‐led using only the top tether and an‐chor.In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a child re‐straint that has LATCH attachments.

The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on howto use the child restraint and its at‐tachments. The following explainshow to attach a child restraint withthese attachments in your vehicle.Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tether an‐chors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCH seat‐ing position that will accommodatea child restraint with lower attach‐ments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle. A toptether anchor is built into the vehicle.The top tether attachment (B) on thechild restraint connects to the toptether anchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement and ro‐tation of the child restraint during driv‐ing or in a crash.Your child restraint may have a singletether (A) or a dual tether (C). Eitherwill have a single attachment (B) tosecure the top tether to the anchor.Some child restraints that have a toptether are designed for use with orwithout the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always

to be attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating po‐sitions with top tether anchors.j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the lower an‐chors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchor symbolis located near the anchor.


Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for the out‐board rear seating positions are loca‐ted on the back of the rear seatback.Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the child re‐straint will be placed.Do not secure a child restraint in a po‐sition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the in‐structions that come with the child re‐straint say that the top tether must beattached.

According to accident statistics, chil‐dren and infants are safer when prop‐erly restrained in a child restraint sys‐tem or infant restraint system securedin a rear seating position. See Whereto Put the Restraint 3 3-37 for addi‐tional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

9 Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using the an‐chors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint, fol‐lowing the instructions that camewith the child restraint and the in‐structions in this manual.

9 Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor. At‐taching more than one child re‐straint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others could beinjured. To reduce the risk of seri‐ous or fatal injuries during a crash,attach only one child restraint peranchor.

9 Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, if thevehicle has one, after the child re‐straint has been installed.


NoticeDo not let the LATCH attachmentsrub against the vehicle’s safetybelts. This may damage these parts.If necessary, move buckled safetybelts to avoid rubbing the LATCH at‐tachments.Do not fold the empty rear seat witha safety belt buckled. This coulddamage the safety belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the safety beltto its stowed position, before foldingthe seat.

Make sure to attach the child restraintat the proper anchor location.This system is designed to make in‐stallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts. Insteaduse the vehicle's anchors and childrestraint attachments to secure therestraints. Some restraints also useanother vehicle anchor to securea top tether.1. Attach and tighten the lower at‐

tachments to the lower anchors. Ifthe child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desired

seating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturer in‐structions and the instructions inthis manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for the

desired seating position.Make sure there are no for‐eign objects around lower an‐chors. Foreign objects can in‐terfere with the proper latch‐ing of the child restraint to theanchors.

1.2. Put the child restraint on theseat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the child re‐straint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tether an‐chor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. You may need to adjust therear compartment storagepanel/cover in the rear cargoarea to access the anchors.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten thetop tether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

•If the rear outboard seatingposition you are using has anadjustable headrest or headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, raise theheadrest or head restraintand route the tether under theheadrest or head restraint


and in between the headrestor head restraint posts.

•If the rear outboard seatingposition you are using has anadjustable headrest or headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route the tetheraround the headrest or headrestraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint indifferent directions to be sure it issecure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

9 Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer tohave the system inspected andany necessary replacementsmade as soon as possible.

9 Warning

Safety procedures must always beobserved when disposing of thevehicle or vehicle parts. Disposalshould only be performed by anauthorized service center, to helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.New parts and repairs may be neces‐sary even if the LATCH system wasnot being used at the time of thecrash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study the in‐structions that came with the child re‐straint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.Do not secure a child seat in a posi‐tion without a top tether fitting if a na‐tional or local law requires that the toptether be attached, or if the instruc‐tions that come with the child restraintsay that the top strap must be at‐tached.Be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.


If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint3 3-37 .1. Put the child restraint on the seat.2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the

lap and shoulder portions of thevehicle's safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child re‐straint instructions will show youhow.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button on thebuckle so that the safety belt could

be quickly unbuckled if neces‐sary.

4. To tighten the belt, push down onthe child restraint, pull the shoul‐der portion of the belt to tightenthe lap portion of the belt and feedthe shoulder belt back into the re‐tractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may behelpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.If the child restraint system hasa lock-off mechanism, use it to se‐cure the vehicle safety belt.

5. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions re‐garding the use of the top tether.

6. Before placing a child in the childrestraint, make sure it is securelyheld in place. To check, push andpull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, un‐buckle the vehicle safety belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetherfitting, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat without Airbag OffSwitch)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint 3 3-37 .A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the air‐bag deploys.


9 Warning

A child in a rear-facing child re‐straint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger airbag in‐flates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflatingairbag. Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat.A child in a forward-facing child re‐straint can be seriously injured orkilled if the outboard front passen‐ger airbag inflates and the passen‐ger seat is in a forward position. Ifyou secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the outboard front pas‐senger seat, always move the pas‐senger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate a child re‐straint, a child restraint should not beinstalled in the vehicle, even if the air‐bag is off.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat with Airbag OffSwitch)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint 3 3-37 .There is a switch on the instrumentpanel that you can use to turn off theoutboard front passenger frontal air‐bag. See Airbag On-Off Switch3 3-27 for more information, includingimportant safety information.A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the air‐bag deploys.

9 Warning

“Do not use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anairbag in front of it!”

9 Warning

When using a child restraint sys‐tem on the front passenger seat,the airbag system for the front pas‐senger seat must be deactivated.If not the triggering of the airbagsposes a risk of fatal injury to thechild. This is especially the case ifrear-facing child restraint systemsare used on the front passengerseat.


9 Warning

A child in a rear-facing child re‐straint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates. This is because the backof the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriously in‐jured or killed if the front passen‐ger airbag inflates and the passen‐ger seat is in a forward position.Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the front passengerfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the front seat, al‐ways move the front passenger

seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

9 Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. For example,the outboard front passenger air‐bag could inflate even though theairbag on-off switch is turned off.To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 3 5-15 for more informa‐tion, including important safety in‐formation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facingchild restraint should not be installedin the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH System)

(All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for howand where to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint is se‐cured using a safety belt and it usesa top tether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH System)(All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for toptether anchor locations.Do not secure a child seat in a posi‐tion without a top tether anchor if a na‐tional or local law requires that the toptether be anchored, or if the instruc‐tions that come with the child restraintsay that the top strap must be anch‐ored.You will be using the lap-shoulder beltto secure the child restraint in this po‐sition. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.1. Move the seat as far back as it will

go before securing the forward-facing child restraint.When the airbag on-off switch hasturned off the outboard front pas‐senger airbags, the off indicator inthe airbag off light should light andstay lit when you start the vehicle.


See Airbag On-Off Light3 5-15 .

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the

lap and shoulder portions of thevehicle's safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child re‐straint instructions will show youhow.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button on thebuckle, so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled if nec‐essary.

5. To tighten the belt, push down onthe child restraint, pull the shoul‐der portion of the belt to tightenthe lap portion of the belt, and feedthe shoulder belt back into the re‐tractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may behelpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.If the child restraint system hasa lock-off mechanism, use it to se‐cure the vehicle safety belt.If the vehicle does not have a rearseat and the child restraint hasa top tether, follow the child re‐

straint manufacturer's instructionsregrading the use of the top tether.See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) (AllOther Markets) 3 3-38 for moreinformation.

6. Before placing a child in the childrestraint, make sure it is securelyheld in place. To check, push andpull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, un‐buckle the vehicle safety belt and letit return to the stowed position.If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the outboard front pas‐senger airbag when you remove thechild restraint from the vehicle unlessthe person who will be sitting there isa member of a passenger airbag riskgroup. See Airbag On-Off Switch3 3-27 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage ........ 4-1Glove Box ................................. 4-1Cupholders ............................... 4-1Front Storage ........................... 4-2Sunglasses Storage ................. 4-2Center Console Storage ........... 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover ............................. 4-3Cargo Management

System .................................. 4-3Convenience Net ...................... 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System ................... 4-4

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel StorageThere may be a storage compartmenton the instrument panel. Pull the han‐dle to open.

Glove Box

Lift the glove box handle up to openit. Use the key to lock and unlock theglove box.The inner partition can be removed tostore larger items.

The inner partition can be stored inthe left side groove of the glove box.The glove box is air conditioned andcan be used to store items at a lowertemperature. The air conditioningmust be turned on for the maximumcool air to enter the glove box. Turnthe adjustment wheel clockwise toadjust the cool air flow. Close theopening during the winter season tokeep cold air from entering the vehi‐cle.

CupholdersThere are cupholders in the centerconsole and in the second row seatarmrest.Pull down the armrest to access thecupholders.

4-2 Storage

Front Storage

A card holder (A) and a storage com‐partment (B) are located on the in‐strument panel.

Sunglasses Storage

Open the sunglass holder by pushingon the rear of the cover.Close it by pulling up and pushing un‐til it latches.

Center Console StorageOpen the front console by pulling upon the lower lever and lifting thecover.Close the front console by loweringthe cover and pushing it down until itlatches.

To use the tray, pull up on the upperlever and lift the cover.The console can be used as an arm‐rest.Open the rear console by lifting thecover of the rear center armrest.

Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeaturesCargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, use itto cover items in the rear of the vehi‐cle.To remove the cover from the vehicle,pull both ends toward each other. Toreinstall, place each end of the coverin the holes behind the rear seat.

Cargo Management SystemNoticeDo not allow items in the storagearea to extend outside the storagearea when the cover is closed. Oth‐erwise, the storage or luggage floormay be damaged. Only store itemsthat fit into the floor storage area orthat allow for the cover to be closed.

This vehicle has a cargo manage‐ment system located in the rear of thevehicle.

Lift the cover up to open and accessthe storage bin. The cover remainsopen when lifted.There are floor side trays on bothsides of the luggage compartmentfloor.

Convenience NetSmall loads can be carried in the op‐tional convenience net. Do not carryheavy objects.To install the net, hang each loop inthe nets upper corners to both an‐chors of the back panel. Hang the twonet hooks in the metal rings on bothlower corners of the floor.

Luggage Floor Net

The luggage floor net can help keepsmall loads from moving during sharpturns or quick starts and stops.Attach the four net hooks in the metalrings on each corner of the floor.

4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System

9 Warning

If something is carried on top of thevehicle that is longer or wider thanthe roof rack — like paneling, ply‐wood, or a mattress — the windcan catch it while the vehicle is be‐ing driven. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, and thiscould cause a collision and dam‐age the vehicle. Never carrysomething longer or wider than theroof rack on top of the vehicle un‐less using a GM certified acces‐sory carrier.

NoticeLoading cargo on the roof rack thatweighs more than 100 kg (220 lbs) orhangs over the rear or sides of thevehicle may damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests evenlybetween the crossrails, making sureto fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securely fas‐tened. Loading cargo on the roof rackwill make the vehicle’s center of grav‐ity higher. Avoid high speeds, suddenstarts, sharp turns, sudden braking,or abrupt maneuvers; otherwise, itmay result in loss of control. If drivingfor a long distance, on rough roads, orat high speeds, occasionally stop thevehicle to make sure the cargo re‐mains in its place.Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehicle ca‐pacity and loading, see Vehicle LoadLimits 3 8-10 .

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview

(C140 (RHD)) ........................ 5-3

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment

(C140) ................................... 5-5Steering Wheel Controls .......... 5-5Horn ......................................... 5-6Windshield Wiper/Washer ........ 5-6Rear Window Wiper/

Washer ................................. 5-7Headlamp Washer ................... 5-8Clock ........................................ 5-8Power Outlets ........................... 5-9Cigarette Lighter ....................... 5-9Ashtrays ................................. 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators ............................ 5-10

Instrument Cluster (C140Diesel KM) .......................... 5-11

Instrument Cluster (C140Gen RHD GAS KM) ............ 5-12

Speedometer .......................... 5-13Odometer ............................... 5-13Trip Odometer ........................ 5-13Tachometer ............................ 5-13Fuel Gauge (C140) ................ 5-13Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge ................................. 5-14Safety Belt Reminders ........... 5-14Airbag Readiness Light .......... 5-15Airbag On-Off Light ................ 5-15Charging System Light ........... 5-17Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 5-17Service Vehicle Soon Light .... 5-19Brake System Warning

Light .................................... 5-19Electric Parking Brake Light ... 5-20Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light ...................... 5-20All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWD

Only) ................................... 5-21Descent Control System

Light .................................... 5-21Speed Sensitive Power

Steering (SSPS) WarningLight .................................... 5-22

Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight .................................... 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light .......... 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light ................... 5-22

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ...................... 5-23

Wait-to-Start Light (DieselOnly) ................................... 5-23

Diesel Particulate FilterLight .................................... 5-23

Engine Oil Pressure Light ...... 5-24Low Engine Oil Level Light

(Diesel Only) ....................... 5-24Change Engine Oil Light ........ 5-24Fuel Economy Light ............... 5-25Low Fuel Warning Light ......... 5-25Water in Fuel Warning Light

(Diesel Only) ....................... 5-25Immobilizer Light .................... 5-25Engine Overspeed Warning

Light .................................... 5-26High-Beam On Light ............... 5-26Automatic Headlamp

Leveling System Light ......... 5-26Front Fog Lamp Light ............. 5-26Rear Fog Lamp Light ............. 5-27Cruise Control Light ............... 5-27Trailer Indicator Light ............. 5-27Door Ajar Light ....................... 5-27

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Anti-theft Alarm System ......... 5-27Gate Ajar Light ....................... 5-28

Vehicle MessagesWarning Buzzers .................... 5-28


Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview (C140 (RHD))


A. Air Vents 3 7-1 .B. Hazard Warning Flashers

3 6-3 .Electronic Stability Control (ESC).See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) 3 8-28 .

C. Driver Information Center (DIC)Display (If Equipped). .Instrument Panel Storage (IfEquipped). See Instrument PanelStorage 3 4-1.

D. Descent Control System (DCS).See Descent Control System(DCS) 3 8-29 .Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLight. See Safety Belt Reminders3 5-14 .

E. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals ( 3 6-3 .Exterior Lamp Controls 3 6-1 .Front Fog Lamps 3 6-4.Rear Fog Lamps 3 6-4 .

F. Instrument Cluster (C140 DieselKM) 3 5-11 Instrument Cluster(C140 Gen RHD GAS KM)3 5-12 .

G. Horn 3 5-6 .H. Windshield Wiper/Washer

(C140) 3 5-6 .Rear Window Wiper/Washer3 5-7 .

I. Airbag On-Off Indicator (If Equip‐ped). See Airbag On-Off Light3 5-15 .

J. Glove Box 3 4-1 .K. AM-FM RadioL. Climate Control Systems (If

Equipped).Automatic Climate ControlSystem (If Equipped) .

M. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 3 8-22 .

N. ECO Button. See Fuel EconomyMode 3 8-24.

O. Parking Brake 3 8-26 .P. Cigarette Lighter 3 5-9 .

Q. Steering Wheel Controls3 5-5 .Phone Buttons (If Equipped). .

R. Steering Wheel Adjustment(C140) 3 5-5 .

S. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp 3 5-17.

T. Cruise Control 3 8-31 (If Equip‐ped).Climate Control Buttons (If Equip‐ped). .

U. Hood Release. See Hood3 9-3 .

V. Coin Storage. See Front Storage3 4-2 .

W. Cardholder. See Front Storage3 4-2 .

X. Power Mirrors 3 2-9 .Headlamp Washer (C140 )3 5-8 (If Equipped).Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 3 6-5 .Headlamp Range Adjustment3 6-2 .


ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment(C140)

Tilt WheelFor vehicles with a tilt wheel:1. Hold the steering wheel and pull

the lever (A) down.2. Move the steering wheel up or

down.3. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the

steering wheel in place.

Tilt and Telescoping WheelFor vehicles with a tilt and telescopingwheel:1. Hold the steering wheel and pull

the lever (A) down.2. Move the steering wheel up or

down.3. Pull or push the steering wheel

closer or away from you.4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the

steering wheel in place.Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Steering Wheel ControlsFor vehicles equipped with audiosteering wheel controls, basic audiosystem operations can be performed.

PWR: Press to turn the system on andoff. Press for a short time to mute.Press again to cancel mute.VOL Q : Press to increase the volumelevel.VOL R : Press to decrease the vol‐ume level.SEEK: Press and release while usingthe radio, or CD player to do one ofthe following:Radio: Press the SEEK button fora short time to search stored radiochannels. (CH1 → CH2 → CH3 → CH4→ CH5 → CH6 → CH1).


Press the SEEK button for a long timeto search for the next receivablehigher station.CD player: Press the SEEK button fora short time to go to the next track.(Track01 → Track02 →).Press the SEEK button for a long timeto fast play.MODE: Press the MODE button tochange mode. (FM1 → FM2 → FM-A→ AM-1 → AM-2 → AM-A → CDP→ FM1.) “CDP” displays when the CDis in the CD player.

HornPress near a horn symbol or press onthe steering wheel pad to sound thehorn.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper lever is locatedon the side of the steering column.The ignition must be turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN to operatethe windshield wipers.

Move the lever to one of the followingpositions:HI: Fast wipes.LO: Slow wipes.INT (Intermittent): Move to this posi‐tion for a delayed wiping cycle. Turnthe band on the windshield wiper to‐ward F for more frequent wipes orS for less frequent wipes. The wipecycle delay time is affected by the ve‐hicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐creases, the delay time will automati‐cally decrease.OFF: Turns the windshield wipers off.

MIST: For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down, and release. Thelever automatically returns to its start‐ing position.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozen tothe windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. SeeWiper BladeReplacement 3 9-24.Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Automatic Windshield Wiperswith Rainsense™For vehicles with automatic wind‐shield wipers with Rainsense, the rainsensor detects the amount of wateron the windshield and automaticallyadjusts the windshield wipers.


AUTO: Turns the windshield wiperson automatically.The sensitivity of the system can beadjusted by turning the band on thewindshield wiper lever toward F or S.If the ignition switch is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY while the wiper lever isin the AUTO position, the windshieldwipers turn on once to check the sys‐tem.OFF: Turns the automatic windshieldwiper system off.

The rain sensor is located near thetop of the windshield and must be freefrom dust and dirt to work properly.

Windshield WasherTo use this feature the ignition mustbe turned to ON/RUN. Pull the wind‐shield washer/wiper lever toward youto spray washer fluid on the wind‐shield.When the lever is pulled and immedi‐ately released, windshield washerfluid is sprayed onto the windshield,but the windshield wipers do not turnon.When the lever is pulled and heldbriefly, windshield washer fluid issprayed onto the windshield. The wip‐ers operate for two wipe cycles afterthe lever is released and one morecycle after three seconds. SeeWasher Fluid 3 9-19 for informationon filling the windshield washer fluid.

9 Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the wind‐shield, blocking your vision.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe vehicle may have a rear windowwiper/washer. The ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition to operate the rear windowwiper/washer.

Turn the end of the windshield wiperlever to operate the rear windowwiper/washer.OFF = Turns the system off.INT = Intermittent wipes.LO = Slow wipes.

To spray washer fluid on the rear win‐dow, press the button at the end of thelever until the washers begin. When


the button is released, the washersstop, but the wipers continue to wipefor about three wipes.

9 Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the wind‐shield, blocking your vision.

Rear Smart WiperFor vehicles with this feature, the rearwiper turns on automatically when theshift lever is set to R (Reverse) whilethe front wiper is on.The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and rear win‐dow. Check the fluid level if eitherwasher is not working. See WasherFluid 3 9-19 .

Headlamp WasherThe vehicle may have headlampwashers. The headlamp washersclear debris from the headlamp len‐ses.

The headlamp washer button is loca‐ted on the instrument panel near theexterior lamp control. The headlampsmust be turned on to use this feature.Press the button to wash the head‐lamps.Washer fluid is sprayed onto theheadlamps. Then the headlampwasher is disabled for about two mi‐nutes. If the washer fluid is low, thewasher system cannot be turned onfor about four minutes after spraying.See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 for moreinformation.

ClockThe clock is located above the radio.When the ignition is in ACC/ACCES‐SORY or ON/RUN, the clock displaysthe time. The clock has three adjust‐ing buttons.H: Hour button.■ To advance one hour, press the

H button.■ To advance more than one hour,

press and hold the H button untilyou reach the correct hour.

M: Minute button.■ To advance one minute, press the

M button.■ To advance more than one minute,

press and hold the M button untilyou reach the correct minute.

R: Reset button. To reset the time tothe nearest hour, press the R button.


■ If you press this button when thetime is between 8:00 and 8:29 forexample, the display will reset to8:00.

■ If you press this button while thetime is between 8:30 and 8:59 forexample, the display will reset to9:00.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets: under the climate con‐trol system, on the rear of the centerfloor console, and in the rear cargoarea.Remove the cover to access and re‐place when not in use.

9 Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

NoticeLeaving electrical equipment plug‐ged in for an extended period of timewhile the vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use and donot plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory power plugs maynot be compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overload ve‐hicle or adapter fuses. If a problem isexperienced, see your dealer.When adding electrical equipment, besure to follow the proper installationinstructions included with the equip‐ment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 3 8-46.

NoticeHanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such ascell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter, itis located below the climate controlsystem.The ignition must be turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.To activate the cigarette lighter, pushit into the heating element and let go.When the lighter is ready it will popback out.NoticeHolding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighterback away from the heating elementwhen it is hot. Damage from over‐heating can occur to the lighter orheating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighterin while it is heating.


AshtraysFor vehicles with a removable ashtrayand cigarette lighter, the ashtray canbe placed into the front console cu‐pholders.To open the ashtray, lift the lid of theashtray. After using, close the lid.To empty the ashtray for cleaning,slightly turn the upper part of the ash‐tray counterclockwise and remove it.NoticeIf papers, pins, or other flammableitems are put in the ashtray, hot cig‐arettes or other smoking materialscould ignite them and possibly dam‐age the vehicle. Never put flamma‐ble items in the ashtray.

Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before it be‐comes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicatea problem with the vehicle.When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on while driving,or when one of the gauges showsthere may be a problem, check thesection that explains what to do. Fol‐low this manual's advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and evendangerous.


Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel KM)


Instrument Cluster (C140 Gen RHD GAS KM)


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far the ve‐hicle has been driven in kilometers.

Trip OdometerThere are two independent trip odom‐eters which measure the distancesthe vehicle has driven since the tripodometer was last set to zero.Trip A and Trip B can be switched bypressing the trip odometer button lo‐cated in the lower right area of thespeedometer.The button located in the lower rightarea of the speedometer allowsswitching between the odometer andthe trip odometer.

To set the trip odometer to zero, pressand hold the button.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).NoticeIf the engine is operated with thetachometer in the shaded warningarea, the vehicle could be damaged,and the damages would not be cov‐ered by the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachom‐eter in the shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge (C140)

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left in the fuel tank whenthe ignition is on.An arrow on the fuel gauge indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel door ison.When the indicator nears empty,there is still a little fuel left, but youshould get more fuel soon.Here are four things that some own‐ers ask about. All these things arenormal and do not indicate that any‐thing is wrong with the fuel gauge:■ At the gas station, the pump shuts

off before the gauge reads full.■ It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up

than the gauge reads. For example,the gauge reads half full, but it tookmore, or less, than half of the tank'scapacity to fill it.


■ The gauge pointer may move whilecornering, braking or accelerating.

■ The gauge may not indicate emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

The vehicle may have a gauge thatshows the engine coolant tempera‐ture.If the gauge pointer moves toward theH, the engine is too hot.This reading indicates the same thingas the warning light. It means that theengine coolant has overheated. If thevehicle has been operating undernormal driving conditions, pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 3 9-17.

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt Reminder LightThere is a driver safety belt reminderlight on the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started, this lightflashes for several seconds to reminda driver to fasten the safety belt. Thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled. This cycle may continue witha chime if the driver remains or be‐comes unbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor thechime comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, this lightflashes for several seconds to remindpassengers to fasten the safety belt.The light stays on solid until the beltis buckled. This cycle may continuewith a chime if the passenger remainsor becomes unbuckled while the ve‐hicle is moving.If the passenger safety belt is buck‐led, neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.The front passenger safety belt warn‐ing light may turn on if an object is puton the seat such as a briefcase, hand‐bag, grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or buckle thesafety belt.


Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is an electri‐cal problem. The system check in‐cludes the airbag sensor, the preten‐sioners, the airbag modules, the wir‐ing, and the crash sensing and diag‐nostic module. For more informationon the airbag system, see AirbagSystem 3 3-21 .

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicleis started.If it stays on after the vehicle has beenstarted or comes on while driving, theairbag system may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced right away.

9 Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid in‐jury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Airbag On-Off LightIf the vehicle has an airbag on-offswitch, it also has a passenger airbagstatus indicator on the passengerside of the instrument panel, abovethe glove box.

A. Front Passenger Airbag SystemsOn

B. Front Passenger Airbag SystemsOff

When the vehicle is started, the pas‐senger airbag status indicator sym‐bols for on and off will light for severalseconds as a system check. Then, af‐ter several more seconds, either theon or off symbol will light to let youknow the status of the front passen‐ger frontal and seat-mounted side im‐pact airbags, and the roof-rail airbagfor the front passenger and the pas‐senger sitting directly behind the frontpassenger.

The off symbol comes on when thefront passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags, and theroof-rail airbag for the front passengerand the passenger sitting directly be‐hind the front passenger are manually


turned off using the airbag on-offswitch, located on the side of the in‐strument panel. The off symbol in thepassenger airbag status indicatorcomes on and stays on as a reminderthat the airbags for the front passen‐ger and the passenger sitting directlybehind the front passenger havebeen turned off. This light will go offwhen the airbags have been turnedon. The belt pretensioners and all thedriver airbag systems will remain ac‐tive. See Airbag On-Off Switch3 3-27 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

9 Warning

If the front passenger airbags areturned off for a person who doesnot fall under the conditions speci‐fied in this manual, that person willnot have the extra protection of theairbags. In a crash, the airbags willnot be able to inflate and help pro‐tect the person sitting there. In ad‐dition, the roof-rail airbag will notbe able to protect the person sit‐ting directly behind the front pas‐senger. Do not turn off the airbagsunless the person sitting in thefront passenger seat falls underthe conditions specified in thismanual.

9 Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. For example,the front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact air‐bags, and the roof-rail airbag forthe front passenger and the pas‐senger sitting directly behind thefront passenger could inflate eventhough the airbag on-off switch isturned off.To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 3 5-15 for more information,including important safety infor‐mation.


When the on symbol is lit, it meansthat the front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags,and the roof-rail airbag for the frontpassenger and the passenger sittingdirectly behind the front passengerare enabled and may inflate. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 3 3-27 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or the airbagon-off switch. See your dealer forservice.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.

The light turns off when the engine isstarted. If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.If the light stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problem withthe electrical charging system. Haveit checked by your dealer. Drivingwhile this light is on could drain thebattery.If a short distance must be driven withthe light on, be sure to turn off all ac‐cessories, such as the radio and airconditioner.

Malfunction Indicator LampA computer system called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Genera‐tion) monitors operation of the fuel,ignition, and emission control sys‐tems. It ensures that emissions are atacceptable levels for the life of the ve‐hicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on when the ignitionis on, but the engine is not running, asa check to show it is working. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.If the check engine light comes onand stays on while the engine is run‐ning, this indicates that there is anOBD II problem and service is re‐quired.Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem is ap‐parent. Being aware of the light canprevent more serious damage to thevehicle. This system assists the serv‐ice technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.


NoticeIf the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emission con‐trols might not work as well, the ve‐hicle fuel economy might not be asgood, and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not be cov‐ered by the vehicle warranty.NoticeModifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuelsystem of the vehicle or the replace‐ment of the original tires with otherthan those of the same Tire Perform‐ance Criteria (TPC) can affect thevehicle's emission controls and cancause this light to come on. Modifi‐cations to these systems could leadto costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could also re‐sult in a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications 3 9-2 .

This light comes on during a malfunc‐tion in one of two ways:Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfire increa‐ses vehicle emissions and coulddamage the emission control systemon the vehicle. Diagnosis and servicemight be required.The following can prevent more seri‐ous damage to the vehicle:

■ Reduce vehicle speed.■ Avoid hard accelerations.■ Avoid steep uphill grades.■ If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when itis safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Finda safe place to park. Turn the key off,wait at least 10 seconds, and restartthe engine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detec‐ted on the vehicle. Diagnosis andservice might be required.

The following may correct an emis‐sion system malfunction:■ Check that the fuel cap is fully in‐

stalled. See Filling the Tank3 8-35 . The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into the atmos‐phere. A few driving trips with thecap properly installed should turnthe light off.

■ Check that the electrical system isnot wet. the system could be wet ifthe vehicle was driven througha deep puddle of water. The condi‐tion is usually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn the light off.

■ Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causes theengine not to run as efficiently asdesigned and may cause: stalling


after start-up, stalling when the ve‐hicle is changed into gear, misfir‐ing, hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration. Theseconditions might go away once theengine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least one fulltank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.See Fuel 3 8-34 .

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)will also come on to indicate that thereis a malfunction in the Diesel Particu‐late Filter (DPF). If this happens seeyour dealer.See Diesel Particulate Filter3 8-20 for more information.If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has the propertest equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical prob‐lems that might have developed.

Service Vehicle Soon Light

The service vehicle soon light comeson when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN and goes out after several sec‐onds.It comes on if a condition exists thatmay require the vehicle to be taken infor service.If the light comes on and stays on,take the vehicle to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle brake system consists oftwo hydraulic circuits. If one circuit isnot working, the remaining circuit canstill work to stop the vehicle. For nor‐mal braking performance, both cir‐cuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have the brake sys‐tem inspected right away.

The Brake System Warning Lightshould come on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

9 Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brake sys‐tem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warninglight on can lead to a crash. If thelight is still on after the vehicle hasbeen pulled off the road and care‐fully stopped, have the vehicletowed for service.


If the light comes on while driving,a chime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor. It mightalso take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle3 9-66 .

Electric Parking Brake Light

For vehicles with the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB), the parking brake statuslight comes on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.The parking brake status light comeson when the brake is applied. If thelight continues flashing after the park‐ing brake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the ElectricParking Brake system.

If the light does not come on, or re‐mains flashing, see your dealer.

For vehicles with the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB), the parking brake warn‐ing light should come on briefly whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is a problem.If this light comes on, there is a prob‐lem with a system on the vehicle thatis causing the parking brake systemto work at a reduced level. The vehi‐cle can still be driven, but should betaken to a dealer as soon as possible.See Parking Brake 3 8-26 for moreinformation

For vehicles with the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB), this indicator comes onwhen the EPB switch is released with‐out pressing the brake pedal. Alwayspress the brake pedal before pressingthe EPB switch to release the ElectricParking Brake.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key is turnedto ON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.If the light stays on, turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as possi‐ble and turn the ignition off. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.


If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while driving, the vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, there are stillbrakes, but no antilock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light isalso on, there are no antilock brakesand there is a problem with the regu‐lar brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light 3 5-19 .

All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWDOnly)

The All-Wheel-Drive Light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN.If it does not, have the vehicle serv‐iced by your dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightthen goes off.

This light comes on when there isa malfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) system.This light flashes when the AWD sys‐tem is temporarily disabled.For more information see All-WheelDrive 3 8-25 .

Descent Control System Light

This light functions as the DescentControl System (DCS) active indica‐tor and not ready/warning light.When the green DCS light comes onsteady, the system is ready for use.When the green light comes on blink‐ing, the system is active.

The DCS not ready warning lightworks in the following manner:■ When the amber light blinks, this in‐

dicates that the DCS is not ready tooperate.

■ When the amber DCS light comeson steady, this indicates that thereis a malfunction in the system.

The blinking and illuminating of theDCS not ready warning light indicatesthat the brake pads need to cooldown. The vehicle should be drivenwith as little heavy braking as safelypossible. The temperature may differsomewhat according to vehicle anddriving conditions.See Descent Control System (DCS)3 8-29 for more information.


Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight

If this warning light comes on after thevehicle ignition is started or while driv‐ing, the speed sensitive power steer‐ing may not be working. See yourdealer for service.

Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight

This light comes on to indicate thatthere is a malfunction in the system.See your dealer for service.See Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 -For Vehicles with 3 Sensors)3 8-33 for more information.

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light

For vehicles with Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this light comes onbriefly while starting the engine.If it does not, have the vehicle serv‐iced by your dealer. If the system isworking normally the indicator lightthen turns off.If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, there could be a prob‐lem with the ESC and the vehicle

might need service. When this warn‐ing light is on, the ESC is off and doesnot limit wheel spin.The light flashes if the system is ac‐tive and is working to assist the driverwith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) 3 8-28 for more information.

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light

For vehicles with Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN.If it does not, have the vehicle serv‐iced by your dealer. If the system isworking normally the indicator lightthen goes off.


This light comes on when the ESCsystem is turned off.The system can be turned off bypressing the ESC control button loca‐ted on the center of the instrumentpanel.For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) 3 8-28 .

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started. If the system isworking normally the indicator lightthen goes off.If it does not, have the vehicle serv‐iced by your dealer.This light indicates that the enginecoolant has overheated.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop the vehicle and turn off the en‐gine to avoid damage to the engine.See Engine Overheating 3 9-17 formore information.

Wait-to-Start Light (DieselOnly)

The wait-to-start light shows that theengine is functioning properly. Whenthe light goes out the engine can bestarted.For more information, see Starting theDiesel Engine 3 8-16 .

Diesel Particulate Filter Light

This indicator comes on or flasheswhen the soot particles accumulatedin the DPF reach a certain amount.The soot particles need to be burnedoff to prevent the filter from clogging.When this indicator comes on orflashes, increase speed to more than50 km/h for about 15 minutes as soonas the road and traffic situations per‐mit. The indicator goes off as soon asthe soot particles are at normal levels.If the engine is shut off while the DPFindicator is on or flashing, increasedfuel consumption and a reduction inengine oil life will occur. Please notethat the driver should continue thedriving regeneration process aboveuntil the DPF indicator goes off.See Diesel Particulate Filter3 8-20 for more information.


NoticeUse of diesel fuel other than UltraLow Sulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfurmaximum) or engine oil other thanlow ash CJ-4 oil will cause perma‐nent damage to the DPF and relatedcomponents. This damage wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

9 Warning

Do not keep driving if the oil pres‐sure is low. The engine can be‐come so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

NoticeLack of proper engine oil mainte‐nance can damage the engine. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

The oil pressure light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Engine Oil Level Light(Diesel Only)

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on asa check to let you know that the lightis working.If this light comes on and stays onwhile the engine is running, it meansyour engine is low on oil. Check theoil level as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil 3 9-7 for further infor‐mation.NoticeLack of proper engine oil mainte‐nance can damage the engine. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

Change Engine Oil Light


This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on have the vehicle serv‐iced by your dealer.When the change engine oil lightcomes on, it means that service is re‐quired on the vehicle.See Scheduled Maintenance3 10-2 and Engine Oil 3 9-7 formore information.After the engine oil is changed, theengine oil life system needs to be re‐set in order to turn off this light. SeeEngine Oil Life System 3 9-10 formore information.

Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when the eco(economy) switch, located on thecenter console near the shifter, is

pressed. Press the switch again toturn off the light and exit the fuel savermode.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light, below thefuel gauge, comes on briefly when theengine is started.This light also comes on when the fueltank is low on fuel. When fuel isadded, the light should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced.

Water in Fuel Warning Light(Diesel Only)

When the water level in the fuel filterexceeds a certain level, this warninglight comes on. If this condition oc‐curs, immediately drain the waterfrom the fuel filter.For the drain procedures, see Waterin Fuel 3 8-34.The warning light goes off when thedraining is complete.NoticeDriving when this warning indicatoris on, can damage the fuel injectionsystem and the engine. If the indica‐tor comes on right after a refuel, itmeans water was pumped into thefuel tank. Turn off the engine imme‐diately. Then, have the waterdrained at once.

Immobilizer Light


The immobilizer light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicator lightturns off.This light comes on when the ignitionis turned from LOCK/OFF to ON/RUNand stays on if the vehicle is immobi‐lized. This happens when an incorrectkey or an unprogrammed key is usedto start the vehicle.If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be a prob‐lem with the theft-deterrent system.See Immobilizer Operation 3 2-8 formore information.

Engine Overspeed WarningLight

For vehicles equipped with the over‐speed warning light, it flashes anda chime sounds to alert the driver toreduce the vehicle's speed when thevehicle goes over 120 km/h.The light will then turn off when thevehicles speed is reduced below120 km/h.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 3 6-2 for more informa‐tion.

Automatic Headlamp LevelingSystem Light

For vehicles with this light, if it comeson while driving, there is a problemwith the vehicle headlamp levelingsystem. See your dealer for service.See Headlamp Range Adjustment3 6-2 for more information.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps, thislight comes on when the front foglamps are in use.


The light goes out when the front foglamps are turned off. See Front FogLamps 3 6-4 for more information.

Rear Fog Lamp Light

If your vehicle has rear fog lamps, thislight will come on when they are inuse.For more information see Rear FogLamps ( 3 6-4 .

Cruise Control Light

This light may come on with an ambercolor when the cruise control ON/OFFbutton is pressed. The light comes ongreen when the cruise control is set.The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl 3 8-31 for more informa‐tion.

Trailer Indicator Light

The trailer indicator light comes onwhen a trailer is connected to the ve‐hicle. It goes out again when thetrailer is disconnected. See TrailerTowing 3 8-40 for more information.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched.

Anti-theft Alarm System

For vehicles with an additional anti-theft system related to Thatcham in‐surance, the anti-theft off indicatorcomes on to indicate that the intrusionand inclination sensor is disabled.This system can be disabled bypressing the button located on theheadliner. Press the button again andthe indicator goes out.


See Anti-theft Alarm System 3 2-7 formore information.

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on, the liftgate isopen or not completely latched. Driv‐ing with the liftgate open can causecarbon monoxide (CO) to enter thevehicle.See Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 formore information.

Vehicle MessagesWarning BuzzersThere are different times when youmay hear a warning buzzer.While driving, you may hear a warn‐ing buzzer when operating the turnsignals, or if the driver or passengersafety belt is not buckled when theseat is occupied and vehicle speedexceeds 22 km/h (14 mph).When the vehicle is parked and thedriver door is open, you will heara warning buzzer if the exterior lampsare left on or the key is in the ignition.

Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls ............ 6-1Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder .............................. 6-2Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer ................................ 6-2Flash-to-Pass ........................... 6-2Headlamp Range

Adjustment ............................ 6-2Daytime Running Lamps

(DRL) .................................... 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 6-3Turn and Lane-Change

Signals .................................. 6-3Front Fog Lamps ...................... 6-4Rear Fog Lamps ...................... 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel Illumination

Control .................................. 6-5Dome Lamps ............................ 6-5Reading Lamps ........................ 6-6

Lighting FeaturesBattery Power Protection ......... 6-6

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls

Version Shown, without AUTO

Version Shown, w/AUTO

The turn signal/multifunction lever lo‐cated on the side of the steering col‐umn operates the exterior lamps.

Turn the exterior lamp control at theend of the lever to the following posi‐tions:OFF or O : Turns all the lamps off.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps, together with the fol‐lowing:

■ Taillamps■ License Plate Lamp■ Instrument Panel Lights5 (Headlamps): Turns on the head‐lamps, together with the following:

■ Taillamps■ License Plate Lamp■ Instrument Panel Lights■ Parking LampsAUTO: For vehicles with automaticheadlamps, the lamps turn on or offautomatically depending on how darkit is outside.To turn the automatic lamp control off,turn the exterior lamp control to O .The control automatically returns toits original position when released.

6-2 Lighting

To turn the automatic lamp control on,turn the control to the O positionagain.Do not cover the sensor located ontop of the instrument panel or the au‐tomatic headlamps will not work prop‐erly.

Exterior Lamps Off ReminderA warning chime sounds, if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition is offand the exterior lamps control is inthe ; or 5 position.If the lamps are turned off while thewarning is chiming and then turnedback on, you will not hear a warningchime.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChangerPush the turn signal/lane changelever away from you to turn the highbeams on.Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in the in‐strument panel cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash-to-pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.To flash the high beams, pull the turnsignal/lane change lever all the waytoward you, then release it.

Headlamp Range Adjustment

For vehicles with manual headlampleveling, the control is located on theoutboard side of the steering column.This feature lets the headlamp rangebe adjusted to suit the vehicle load.The low-beam headlamps must be onto adjust the headlamp leveling.■ 0 = Front seat occupied.■ 1 = All seats occupied.■ 2 = All seats occupied and load in

the luggage compartment.■ 3 = Driver seat occupied and load

in the luggage compartment.

Lighting 6-3

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)For vehicles with Daytime RunningLamps (DRL), it makes it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicleduring the day. The DRL come on au‐tomatically when the engine is star‐ted.The DRL system will turn off under thefollowing conditions:■ The ignition is off.■ The parking lamps are on.■ The low-beam headlamps are on.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flasher button islocated on the instrument panelabove the audio system.| Hazard Warning Flasher: Press tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.Press the button again to turn theflashers off.

The hazard warning button will be lit,when a door is opened. If the key isremoved from the ignition and a door

is opened and closed, the hazardwarning button will light up for about10 minutes.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.Move the lever all the way up or downto signal a turn.

6-4 Lighting

Raise or lower the lever until the ar‐row starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. The arrowflashes automatically three times.The lever returns to its starting posi‐tion whenever it is released.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps, theyare controlled by the # band locatedon the middle of the turn signal/multi‐function lever.To use the front fog lamps, the low-beam headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.

Turn the band to # to turn the front foglamps on. The band automatically re‐turns to its starting position when re‐leased. The front fog lamp indicatorlight comes on in the instrument panelcluster. See Front Fog Lamp Light3 5-26 .To turn the front fog lamps off, turn theband to # again. The fog lamp indi‐cator light will go off.For vehicles with automatic head‐lamps, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps come on when turn‐ing on the front fog lamps.

Rear Fog Lamps

For vehicles with rear fog lamps, theyare controlled by the s band locatedon the middle of the turn signal/multi‐function lever.To use the rear fog lamps, the low-beam headlamps or parking lampsand the front fog lamps must be on.Turn the band to s to turn the rear foglamps on. The band automatically re‐turns to its starting position when re‐leased. The rear fog lamp indicatorlight comes on in the instrument panelcluster. See Front Fog Lamp Light3 5-26 .To turn the rear fog lamps off, turn theband to s again. The rear fog lampindicator light will go off.For vehicles with automatic head‐lamps, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps come on when turn‐ing on the rear fog lamps.

Lighting 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControlThis feature controls the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights.

To dim or brighten the instrumentpanel lights, press the button and turnit clockwise or counterclockwise.

Dome LampsPress the button on the dome lamp toturn it on or off.

The dome lamps come on whena door or the liftgate is opened. Thelamps will stay on for about five mi‐nutes. If the door or liftgate is closed,the lamps gradually dim after about10 seconds and then turn off.

Dome Lamp Override

* (Dome Lamp Override): Press tokeep the dome lamps and other inte‐rior lamps turned off while any door isopen. Press again to return it to theout position and the lamps automati‐cally come on when any door isopened.

6-6 Lighting

Reading Lamps

( / ) : Press the button near eachlamp to turn the reading lamps on oroff.

Lighting FeaturesBattery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the headlamps,parking lamps, fog lamps, etc. if theyare left on when the ignition is movedto the LOCK/OFF position. This helpsto prevent the battery from runningdown.Battery rundown protection will notwork if the lamps are turned on againafter this feature operated.

Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls

Air VentsAIR VENTS .............................. 7-1

Control PanelCONTROL PANEL ................... 7-2TEMPERATURE CONTROL

KNOB .................................... 7-3FAN CONTROL KNOB ............ 7-3AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE

KNOB .................................... 7-3RECIRCULATION MODE

BUTTON ............................... 7-4

Air ConditioningAIR CONDITIONING ................ 7-5A/C BUTTON ........................... 7-6COOLING ................................. 7-6

HeatingHEATING ................................. 7-7

VentilationVENTILATION .......................... 7-7

Defrosting and DefoggingDEFROSTING AND

DEFOGGING ........................ 7-8

Automatic Climate Control(option)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...... 7-9DISPLAY PANEL ..................... 7-9AUTOMATIC

TEMPERATURECONTROL .......................... 7-10

MANUAL CONTROL .............. 7-11DEFROSTING ........................ 7-12OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

DISPLAY ............................. 7-12TEMPERATURE UNIT

CHANGE ............................ 7-12

Operating Tips for VentilationSystem

OPERATING TIPS FORVENTILATION SYSTEM .... 7-13

Air VentsSide ventsYou can direct air through both ad‐justable side vents toward either sideof the front passenger area, or towardthe side windows.

1. Side vent2. Windshield defroster vent3. Center vent4. Floor vent5. Front door window defroster vent

Windshield defroster ventsThe windshield defroster vents directair onto the windshield.

7-2 Climate Controls

Center ventsYou can control the direction of air‐flow through both adjustable centervents.Floor ventsThe floor vents direct air into the frontfoot area.Front door window defroster ventsThe front door window defroster ventsdirect air onto the side windows,mainly in the area near the outsidemirror.Rear vents*Cooled or heated air travels to therear foot area through ducts under‐neath the front seats.To shut off the centre vents and theside ventsTurn the wheel below or next to eachvent outlet to block the airflow throughthe vents.

Control Panel

1. Temperature control knob.2. Fan control knob.3. Air distribution mode knob.4. Air conditioning (A/C) button*.

See “AIR CONDITIONING”3 7-5 later in this section.

5. Recirculation button.6. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster button. See “REARWINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR‐ROR DEFROSTER BUTTON” inthe index.


TEMPERATURE CONTROLKNOBThe temperature control knob con‐trols the temperature of the air thatcomes through the air vents.Turn the knob to the blue area to getcool air and to the red area to getwarm air.

FAN CONTROL KNOBYou may control the rate of airflowcoming from the system by turningthe fan speed control knob. Turn the

knob clockwise to increase the fanspeed and counterclockwise to de‐crease the fan speed.The fan control knob is adjustablefrom the off position through to step 4.

AIR DISTRIBUTION MODEKNOBAdjust the air distribution knob to thedesired mode which you want to di‐rect the air flow.The air distribution knob can be set inone of five positions:

Front ( E)This setting directs air through centerand side vents.


Bi-level ( ()Directs air in two ways. Half of the airthrough the floor vents and the re‐maining through the center and sidevents.

Floor ( 5)Directs most of the air through thefloor vents. Some of the air will alsobe directed to the windscreen de‐froster vents, side vents, and rearvents. Keep the area under the frontseats clear in order not to block theairflow to the rear compartment.

Floor/Defrost ( É)This mode directs most of the airthrough windscreen defroster vents,front door window defroster vents andthe floor vents. A small amount of airis also directed to the side vents.

Defrost ( 1)Directs most of the air through thewindscreen and front door windowdefroster vents. A small amount of airis also directed to the side vents.

RECIRCULATION MODEBUTTONPress this button when driving industy conditions or to avoid traffic pol‐lution or outside fumes, and whenquick cooling or heating of the pas‐senger area is required. The indicatorlight will illuminate and interior air willbe recirculated.


Pressing the recirculation mode but‐ton again will draw outside air into thepassenger compartment. The indica‐tor will go out.Your windows may fog if you use therecirculation mode for extended peri‐ods. If this happens, press the recir‐culation button again for the outsideair mode.

9 Caution

Driving with recirculation mode forprolonged period of time can makeyou sleepy.■ Periodically turn to the outside

air mode for fresh air.

Air ConditioningThe refrigeration unit of the air condi‐tioning (A/C) system cools and re‐moves moisture, dust, and pollenfrom the air inside your vehicle.Even with the A/C on, your vehicle willproduce warm air if you set the tem‐perature control knob to warm.NoticeYou may notice water drip under en‐gine room sometimes after drivingwith A/C on. This is normal becauseyour cooling system removes themoisture from the air.NoticeBecause the compressor of the cool‐ing system shares the engine power,you may notice slight change in en‐gine power and performance whenthe compressor operates.


A/C BUTTON

9 Caution

Using your air conditioning (A/C)system while driving up long hillsor in heavy traffic can cause theengine overheating. (See “OVER‐HEATING” in the index)■ Watch temperature gauge.■ Turn OFF the A/C if the gauge

indicates engine overheating.Vehicle can be damaged.

To turn on the air conditioning (A/C):1. Start the engine.2. Press A/C button. (Indicator light

will come on to confirm the A/C isrunning)

3. Adjust fan speed.NoticeThe air conditioning will not operatewhen the fan control knob is in theoff position.

To turn off the A/C:Press A/C button again. (Indicatorlight will go off to confirm the A/C isnot running)

COOLINGMaximum coolingTo achieve maximum cooling duringhot weather and when your vehiclehas been exposed to the sun fora long time:1. Open windows slightly to let warm

air escape.2. Turn air conditioning (A/C) on. (In‐

dicator illuminates)

3. Press recirculation button. (Indi‐cator illuminates)

4. Turn air distribution knob toFRONT mode ( E).

5. Turn temperature control knob allthe way to the blue area for cool‐ing.

6. Turn fan control knob to highestspeed.

Normal cooling1. Turn on the air conditioning (A/C)

button. (Indicator illuminates)2. Press recirculation button. (Indi‐

cator illuminates)3. Turn the air distribution knob to

FRONT ( E) or BI-LEVEL ( ().4. Turn temperature control knob to

blue area for cooling.5. Adjust the fan control knob to the

desired speed.


HeatingMaximum heatingUse the maximum heating mode forquick heating of the passenger area.Do not use it for lengthy periods be‐cause the interior air may becomestale and the windows may fog. Toclear the windows, turn off the recir‐culation button to allow fresh air intothe vehicle.For maximum heating:1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In‐

dicator goes off)2. Press recirculation button. (Indi‐

cator illuminates)3. Turn air distribution knob to BI-

LEVEL ( () or FLOOR (5 ).4. Turn temperature control knob all

the way to the red area for heat‐ing.

5. Turn fan control knob to maximumspeed.

Normal heating1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In‐

dicator goes off)2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator

goes off)3. Turn air distribution knob to

FLOOR ( 5) or BI-LEVEL ( ().4. Turn temperature control knob to

red area for heating.5. Turn fan control knob to desired

speed.

VentilationBi-levelUse this setting on cool, but sunnydays. Warmer air will flow into thefloor area and cool, outside air willflow toward your upper body.To use this setting:1. Turn off recirculation button. (In‐

dicator goes off)2. Turn air distribution knob to BI-

LEVEL ( ().3. Adjust temperature control knob

to the desired temperature.4. Turn fan control knob to the de‐

sired speed.VentilationTo direct air through the center andside vents:1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In‐

dicator goes off)2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator

goes off)3. Turn the air distribution knob to

FRONT (E ) or BI-LEVEL (( ).


4. Turn temperature control knob toblue area for cooling.

5. Turn temperature control knob toblue area for cooling.

6. Turn fan control knob to desiredspeed.

Defrosting and DefoggingTo defrost the windscreen:1. Turn the air distribution knob to

DEFROST ( 1).2. Turn temperature control knob to

red area for warm air.3. Adjust the fan control knob to

highest speed for quick defrost‐ing.

NoticeThe A/C and outside air mode areautomatically turned on to improvethe performance of the defrosterwhen you select DEFROST ( 1) orFLOOR/ DEFROST (É ) mode.

To keep the windshield clear and di‐rect warm air through floor, turn the airdistribution knob to FLOOR/DE‐FROST ( É).

9 Caution

The difference between the out‐side air and the temperature of thewindshield can cause the windowsto fog, thereby restricting yourfront vision.■ Do not use FLOOR/DEFROST

(É ) or DEFROST ( 1) in ex‐tremely humid weather whenthe temperature control knob isset to the blue area.

This can lead to an accident whichcan damage your vehicle andcause personal injuries.


Automatic ClimateControl (option)GENERAL DESCRIPTIONFull automatic temperature control(FATC) system controls the interiortemperature in your vehicle automat‐ically and provides a the greatestamount of comfort in the interior re‐gardless of the weather, outside tem‐perature or season. It will achieve thedesired temperature when you selectthe AUTO mode.The desired temperature is controlledby an in-car sensor signal, coolanttemperature, sun sensor signal andthe ambient temp. sensor signal.Sunlight sensorSunlight sensor is located in front ofthe windshield defroster vents. Thissensor detects sunlight when operat‐ing in AUTO mode. Do not cover thesensor in order not to get wrong in‐formation.

Temperature sensorTemperature information sampledfrom the interior of your car is used inestablishing ventilation system re‐quirements when operating in AUTOmode.

9 Caution

Do not place stickers over the tem‐perature sensor as this will impairits function.

DISPLAY PANEL1. Set temperature2. Defroster indicator3. Air distribution mode indicator4. Air conditioning indicator5. Outside temperature6. Auto mode indicator7. Outside air mode indicator8. Recirculation mode indicator9. Fan operation indicator

10. Fan speed indicator


AUTOMATICTEMPERATURE CONTROLWhen you operate your FATC inAUTO mode, the only thing you haveto do is just set the desired tempera‐ture to your preference.AUTO buttonWhen the AUTO button is pressed,the interior temperature will be con‐trolled automatically to reach the de‐sired preset temperature. The systemwill control air distribution mode, fanspeed, air conditioning and recircula‐tion functions automatically.AUTO mode indicator will appear inthe DIC (Driver Information Center)located in the center of the instrumentpanel.

To set the desired temperatureRotate the temperature control knobuntil the desired temperature is dis‐played.Clockwise : The desired temperaturewill increase by 0.5°C(1°F).Counterclockwise : The desired tem‐perature will decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).You can set the desired temperatureat your preference between 18°C and32°C.

NoticeWhen desired temperature is set at“Lo” (minimum), the fan operatescontinuously at highest speed evenafter the interior temperature rea‐ches the preset temperature.

To turn off the system, press theOFF button.


MANUAL CONTROLA/C buttonTurns the air conditioning on or off.AUTO mode is cancelled and indica‐tor will go off when this button ispressed.The A/C indicator (# ) will illuminatewhen the air conditioning is on.Press the A/C button again to turn theA/C off, or press the OFF button toturn the entire system off.Refer to “A/C BUTTON” 3 7-6 earlierin this section

Air distribution mode changeIf the MODE button is pressed,AUTO mode is cancelled and the airdistribution mode will be changed inthe following sequence.FRONT( E) →BI-LEVEL(( )→FLOOR(5 ) → FLOOR/DE‐FROST( É)Refer to “AIR DISTRIBUTION MODEKNOB” 3 7-3 earlier in this section formore information.

Recirculation mode buttonSelects either outside air or recircula‐ted inside air.Refer to “RECIRCULATION MODEBUTTON” 3 7-4 earlier in this section.


Fan speed control knobAdjust the fan speed by rotating thisknob.AUTO mode is cancelled when thisknob is rotated.

DEFROSTINGPress the DEFROST button ( 1) todefrost the windscreen. The A/C andoutside air mode are automaticallyturned on.Adjust the fan speed using fan speedcontrol knob.This mode can be cancelled by press‐ing the defrost button again, air distri‐bution mode knob or AUTO button.

Refer to “DEFROSTING AND DE‐FOGGING” 3 7-8 earlier in this sec‐tion.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATUREDISPLAYThe outside temperature is alwaysdisplayed in the DIC. Refer to“DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER”in the index.The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper area.Due to its location, the displayed tem‐perature can be affected by road orengine heat while slow driving oridling.

TEMPERATURE UNITCHANGETo change the temperature unit, dothe followings:1. Press SET button on the driver in‐

formation center for more than2 seconds. The temperature unitwill blink.

2. Press the Q or R button to changethe temperature unit (°C↔ °F).


Operating Tips forVentilation SystemIf your vehicle has been parked in di‐rect sunlight, open the windows be‐fore turning on the air conditioning (A/C).To clear foggy windows on rainy daysor in high humidity, decrease the hu‐midity using the A/C.Turn on the A/C system for a few mi‐nutes at least once a week, even inwinter or when the A/C system is notbeing used regularly. This maintainsproper lubrication of the compressorand the seals and will prolong theservice life of the system.Driving in stop-and-go traffic may re‐duce the effectiveness of the A/C sys‐tem.The A/C compressor does not oper‐ate when the fan control knob isturned off.If your vehicle is equipped with airconditioner filter, proper maintenanceis required. See “AIR CONDITIONERFILTER” in the index. This filter re‐

moves dust, pollen and other airborneirritants from the outside air which isdrawn into your vehicle.Rear Air ConditionYou can turn on rear air condition bypress “REAR A/C” button at frontpanel.

Once the light at botton come up,means the rear air condition is beingturn on. However, the rear air condi‐toon will not start working if rearblower switch is being “Step 0”


Once you rotate knob switch to step1, 2 or 3 the air flow will come out fromGrille panel. The rear air condition isbeing work. The air flow speed willdepend on blower step.NoticeRear blower switch will not operatewhen Rear A/C switch off and A/Cswitch off.Rear blower switch will not operatewhen Rear A/C switch off and A/Cswitch on.

NoticeRear blower switch will operate butthe air conditioning system will notoperate when Rear A/C switch onand A/C switch off.Rear blower switch and the air con‐ditioning system will operate whenRear A/C switch on and A/C switchoff.

Step 1 2 3

Air Flow Low Middle High

Driving and Operating 8-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better Fuel

Economy ............................... 8-2Drunk Driving ........................... 8-2Control of a Vehicle .................. 8-3Braking ..................................... 8-3Steering .................................... 8-4Off-Road Recovery .................. 8-5Loss of Control ......................... 8-5Driving on Wet Roads .............. 8-6Highway Hypnosis .................... 8-6Hill and Mountain Roads .......... 8-7Winter Driving ........................... 8-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck ............... 8-9Vehicle Load Limits ................ 8-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-13Ignition Positions .................... 8-14Starting the Gasoline

Engine ................................. 8-15Starting the Diesel Engine ...... 8-16Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) .................................. 8-17

Shifting Into Park .................... 8-18Shifting out of Park ................. 8-19Parking over Things That

Burn .................................... 8-20

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust ...................... 8-20Diesel Particulate Filter .......... 8-20Running the Vehicle While

Parked ................................ 8-21

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission ......... 8-22Manual Mode ......................... 8-24Fuel Economy Mode .............. 8-24

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ...................... 8-25

BrakesAntilock Brake System

(ABS) .................................. 8-25Parking Brake ......................... 8-26Brake Assist ........................... 8-28

Ride Control SystemsElectronic Stability Control

(ESC) .................................. 8-28Descent Control System

(DCS) .................................. 8-29Limited-Slip Differential .......... 8-30

Continuous Damping Control(CDC) .................................. 8-30

Automatic Level Control ......... 8-30

Cruise ControlCruise Control ........................ 8-31

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist

(UD7 - For Vehicles with3 Sensors) .......................... 8-33

FuelFuel ........................................ 8-34Fuel for Petrol Engines ........... 8-34Fuel for Diesel Engines .......... 8-34Water in Fuel .......................... 8-34Running Out of Fuel ............... 8-35Filling the Tank ....................... 8-35Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ............................ 8-36

TowingGeneral Towing Information ... 8-37Driving Characteristics and

Towing Tips ........................ 8-37Trailer Towing ........................ 8-40Weight of the Trailer ............... 8-41Weight of the Trailer

Tongue ................................ 8-42

8-2 Driving and Operating

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires .................................... 8-43

Towing Equipment ................. 8-43Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .... 8-46

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical

Equipment ........................... 8-46

Driving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible.■ Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.■ Brake gradually and avoid abrupt

stops.■ Avoid idling the engine for long pe‐

riods of time.■ When road and weather conditions

are appropriate, use cruise control.■ Always follow posted speed limits

or drive more slowly when condi‐tions require.

■ Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.■ Combine several trips into a single

trip.■ Replace the vehicle's tires with the

same TPC Spec number moldedinto the tire's sidewall near the size.

■ Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Drunk Driving

9 Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, percep‐tions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can havea serious — or even fatal — colli‐sion if you drive after drinking.Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a global trag‐edy.Alcohol affects four things that any‐one needs to drive a vehicle: judg‐ment, muscular coordination, vision,and attentiveness.The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem is forpeople never to drink alcohol andthen drive.


Medical research shows that alcoholin a person's system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord, or heart. Thismeans that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger— is in a crash, that person's chanceof being killed or permanently disa‐bled is higher than if the person hadnot been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help tocontrol the vehicle while driving —brakes, steering, and accelerator. Attimes, as when driving on snow or ice,it is easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and road canprovide. Meaning, you can lose con‐trol of the vehicle.Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications3 9-2 .

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light3 5-19 .Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only anaverage. It might be less with onedriver and as long as two or three sec‐onds or more with another. Age,physical condition, alertness, coordi‐nation, and eyesight all play a part. Sodo alcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That couldbe a lot of distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.And, of course, actual stopping dis‐tances vary greatly with the surface ofthe road, whether it is pavement orgravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread;

the condition of the brakes; the weightof the vehicle; and the amount ofbrake force applied.Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavy accel‐eration followed by heavy braking —rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes mightnot have time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster with a lot of heavy braking.Keeping pace with the traffic and al‐lowing realistic following distanceseliminates a lot of unnecessary brak‐ing. That means better braking andlonger brake life.If the engine ever stops while the ve‐hicle is being driven, brake normallybut do not pump the brakes. If thebrakes are pumped, the pedal couldget harder to push down. If the enginestops, there will still be some powerbrake assist but it will be used whenthe brake is applied. Once the powerassist is used up, it can take longer tostop and the brake pedal will beharder to push.


Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications3 9-2 .

SteeringPower SteeringIf power steering assist is lost be‐cause the engine stops or the powersteering system is not functioning, thevehicle can be steered but it will takemore effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a rea‐sonable speed.Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the road sur‐face, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While ina curve, speed is the one factor thatcan be controlled.If there is a need to reduce speed, doit before entering the curve, while thefront wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintaina reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can bemore effective than braking. For ex‐ample, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you.These problems can be avoided bybraking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot stop in timebecause there is no room. That is thetime for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking 3 8-3 . It isbetter to remove as much speed aspossible from a collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires closeattention and a quick decision. If hold‐ing the steering wheel at the recom‐mended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, itcan be turned a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand.But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten thewheel once you have avoided the ob‐ject.The fact that such emergency situa‐tions are always possible is a goodreason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety beltsproperly.


Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto the shoul‐der while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement, recoveryshould be fairly easy. Ease off the ac‐celerator and then, if there is nothingin the way, steer so that the vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, untilthe right front tire contacts the pave‐ment edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the road‐way.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the threecontrol systems — brakes, steering,and acceleration — do not haveenough friction where the tires meetthe road to do what the driver hasasked.In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three control systems.In the braking skid, the wheels are notrolling. In the steering or corneringskid, too much speed or steering ina curve causes tires to slip and lose

cornering force. And in the accelera‐tion skid, too much throttle causes thedriving wheels to spin.If the vehicle starts to slide, ease yourfoot off the accelerator pedal andquickly steer the way you want thevehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, the vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or other ma‐terial is on the road. For safety, slowdown and adjust your driving to theseconditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance is longer and vehi‐cle control more limited.While driving on a surface with re‐duced traction, try to avoid suddensteering, acceleration, or braking, in‐cluding reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires toslide. You might not realize the sur‐face is slippery until the vehicle isskidding. Learn to recognize warning


clues — such as enough water, ice, orpacked snow on the road to makea mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehi‐cle traction and affect your ability tostop and accelerate. Always driveslower in these types of driving con‐ditions and avoid driving throughlarge puddles and deep-standing orflowing water.

9 Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could cause pull‐ing to one side. You could losecontrol of the vehicle.After driving through a large pud‐dle of water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause the ve‐hicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ig‐nore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle's tiresso they actually ride on the water.This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast

enough. When the vehicle is hydro‐planing, it has little or no contact withthe road.There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:■ Allow extra following distance.■ Pass with caution.■ Keep windshield wiping equipment

in good shape.■ Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.■ Have good tires with proper tread

depth. See Tires 3 9-39 .■ Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving. If youbecome tired or sleepy, find a safeplace to park the vehicle and rest.


Other driving tips include:■ Keep the vehicle well ventilated.■ Keep interior temperature cool.■ Keep your eyes moving — scan the

road ahead and to the sides.■ Check the rearview mirror and ve‐

hicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving inthese conditions include:■ Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.■ Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, and transmis‐sion.

■ Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

9 Warning

If you do not shift down, the brakescould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhillslope.

9 Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when goingdownhill.

■ Stay in your own lane. Do not swingwide or cut across the center of theroad. Drive at speeds that let youstay in your own lane.

■ Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

■ Pay attention to special road signs(falling rocks area, winding roads,long grades, passing or no-passingzones) and take appropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow orice between the tires and the road,creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 0°C (32°F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall, resulting ineven less traction. Avoid driving onwet ice or in freezing rain until roadscan be treated with salt or sand.


Drive with caution, whatever the con‐dition. Accelerate gently so traction isnot lost. Accelerating too quickly cau‐ses the wheels to spin and makes thesurface under the tires slick, so thereis even less traction.Try not to break the fragile traction. Ifyou accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish the sur‐face under the tires even more.The Antilock Brake System (ABS)3 5-20 improves vehicle stability dur‐ing hard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement.Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch for slip‐pery spots. Icy patches can occur onotherwise clear roads in shadedareas. The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.Turn off cruise control on slippery sur‐faces.

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be a serioussituation. Stay with the vehicle unlessthere is help nearby. To get help andkeep everyone in the vehicle safe:■ Turn on the hazard warning flash‐

ers.■ Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

9 Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaust un‐der the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. En‐gine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can cause un‐consciousness and even death.If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:■ Clear away snow from around

the base of your vehicle, espe‐cially any that is blocking the ex‐haust pipe.

■ Check again from time to time tobe sure snow does not collectthere.

■ Open a window about 5 cm (2 in)on the side of the vehicle that isaway from the wind to bring infresh air.

■ Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

■ Adjust the climate control sys‐tem to a setting that circulatesthe air inside the vehicle and set


the fan speed to the highest set‐ting. See Climate Control Sys‐tem in the Index.

For more information about car‐bon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 3 8-20 .Snow can trap exhaust gases un‐der your vehicle. This can causedeadly CO (Carbon Monoxide)gas to get inside. CO could over‐come you and kill you. You cannotsee it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clearaway snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any thatis blocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods onlyas needed to keep warm, but be care‐ful.To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warm thevehicle and then shut the engine offand close the window most of the wayto save heat. Repeat this until helparrives but only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help to arrive,now and then when you run the en‐gine, push the accelerator pedalslightly so the engine runs faster thanthe idle speed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible to savefuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow.If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use the rock‐ing method.

9 Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. The ve‐hicle can overheat, causing an en‐gine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid going above55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains 3 9-48 .


Rocking the Vehicle to Get it OutTurn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction system.Shift back and forth between R (Re‐verse) and a forward gear, or witha manual transmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse),spinning the wheels as little as possi‐ble. To prevent transmission wear,wait until the wheels stop spinning be‐fore shifting gears. Release the ac‐celerator pedal while shifting, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in the for‐ward and reverse directions causesa rocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get the vehicleout after a few tries, it might need tobe towed out. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see Towing theVehicle 3 9-66 .

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know how muchweight the vehicle can carry. Thisweight is called the vehicle capacity

weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on thevehicle show how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certificationlabel.

9 Warning

Do not load the vehicle any heav‐ier than the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either the max‐imum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). This cancause systems to break andchange the way the vehicle han‐dles. This could cause loss of con‐trol and a crash. Overloading canalso shorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire and LoadingInformation label is attached to thevehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver door open, you will find thelabel attached near the door lockpost. The Tire and Loading Informa‐tion label shows the number of occu‐pant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B)in kilograms and pounds.


The Tire and Loading Information la‐bel also shows the tire size of the orig‐inal equipment tires (C) and the rec‐ommended cold tire inflation pres‐sures (D). For more information ontires and inflation, see Tires 3 9-39and Tire Pressure 3 9-40 .There is also important loading infor‐mation on the Certification label. Ittells you the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for the frontand rear axle. See “Certification La‐bel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement “The com‐

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam‐ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loa‐ded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the availa‐ble cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

See Trailer Towing 3 8-40 for im‐portant information on towing a trailer,towing safety rules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Ex‐ample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs).


Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg(250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Load‐ing Information label for specific infor‐mation about the vehicle's capacityweight and seating positions. The

combined weight of the driver, pas‐sengers, and cargo should never ex‐ceed the vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification label isattached to the lower area of the cen‐ter pillar (B-Pillar) on the driver side ofthe vehicle. The label tells the grossweight capacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the


GVWR for the vehicle, or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.If the vehicle is carrying a heavy load,it should be spread out. See “Stepsfor Determining Correct Load Limit”earlier in this section.

9 Warning

Do not load the vehicle any heav‐ier than the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either the max‐imum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). This cancause systems to break andchange the way the vehicle han‐dles. This could cause loss of con‐trol and a crash. Overloading canalso shorten the life of the vehicle.

9 Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sud‐den stop or turn, or in a crash.■ Put things in the cargo area of

the vehicle. In the cargo area,put them as far forward as pos‐sible. Try to spread the weightevenly.

■ Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle sothat some of them are above thetops of the seats.

■ Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in the vehicle.

■ Secure loose items in the vehi‐cle.

■ Do not leave a seat folded downunless needed.

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-InNoticeThe vehicle does not need an elab‐orate break-in. But it will perform bet‐ter in the long run if you follow theseguidelines:■ Do not drive at any one constant

speed, fast or slow, for the first805 km (500 miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoid down‐shifting to brake or slow the vehi‐cle.

■ Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 322 km (200 miles) or so. Dur‐ing this time the new brake liningsare not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean prema‐ture wear and earlier replacement.


Follow this breaking-in guidelineevery time you get new brake lin‐ings.

■ Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing 3 8-40 forthe trailer towing capabilities of thevehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be gradually in‐creased.

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch has four differentpositions.

NoticeUsing a tool to force the key to turnin the ignition could cause damageto the switch or break the key. Usethe correct key, make sure it is all theway in, and turn it only with yourhand. If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. Re‐tained Accessory Power (RAP) willremain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 3 8-17 .This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, and au‐tomatic transmission. Push in the ig‐nition switch as you turn the key to‐ward you.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will causea loss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable the air‐bags.

In an emergency, if the vehicle mustbe shut off while driving:1. Brake using a firm and steady

pressure. Do not pump the brakesrepeatedly. This may depletepower assist, requiring increasedbrake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shift toP (Park) with an automatic trans‐mission, or Neutral with a manualtransmission. Turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 3 8-26 .

9 Warning

Turning off the vehicle while mov‐ing may cause loss of power assistin the brake and steering systemsand disable the airbags. Whiledriving, only shut the vehicle off inan emergency.


5. If the vehicle must be shut offwhile driving, turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with your wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from right toleft while turning the key to ACC/AC‐CESSORY. If this doesn't work, thenthe vehicle needs service.ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This po‐sition provides power to some of theelectrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition. To movethe key from ACC/ACCESSORY toLOCK/OFF, push in the key and thenturn it to LOCK/OFF.ON (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when the engineis running. This position can be usedto operate the electrical accessories.To shift out of P (Park), turn the igni‐tion to ON/RUN and apply the brakepedal.The battery could be drained if youleave the key in the ACC/ACCES‐SORY or ON/RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to

start the vehicle if the battery is al‐lowed to drain for an extended periodof time.START: This position starts the en‐gine. When the engine starts, releasethe key. The ignition switch will returnto ON/RUN for normal driving.

Starting the Gasoline EngineAutomatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start inany other position. To restart the ve‐hicle when it is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.NoticeShifting into P (Park) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transmis‐sion. Shift into P (Park) only whenthe vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Do

not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the en‐gine and transmission gently to al‐low the oil to warm up and lubri‐cate all moving parts.

NoticeHolding the key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will causethe battery to be drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat candamage the starter motor. Waitabout 15 seconds between each tryto help avoid draining the battery ordamaging the starter.2. If the engine does not start, wait

about 15 seconds and try again tostart the engine by turning the ig‐nition to START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.When the engine has run about10 seconds to warm up, the vehi‐cle is ready to be driven. Do notrun the engine at high speed whenit is cold.If the weather is below freezing(32°F or 0°C), let the engine runfor a few minutes to warm up.


3. If the engine still will not start, orstarts but then stops, it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the accelerator pedalall the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing,but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the en‐gine.

NoticeThe engine is designed to work withthe electronics in the vehicle. If elec‐trical parts or accessories areadded, you could change the waythe engine operates. Before addingelectrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Any re‐sulting damage would not be cov‐ered by the vehicle warranty.

Starting the Diesel EngineThe diesel engine starts differentlythan a gasoline engine.

Automatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start inany other position. To restart the ve‐hicle when it is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.NoticeShifting into P (Park) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transmis‐sion. Shift into P (Park) only whenthe vehicle is stopped.

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.Observe the wait-to-start light.See Wait-to-Start Light (DieselOnly) 3 5-23 . This light may notcome on if the engine is warm.

2. As soon as the wait-to-start lightgoes off, immediately turn the ig‐nition key to START. When theengine starts, let go of the key.The engine has a fast warm-upglow plug system. The wait-to-start light will illuminate for a muchshorter time than most diesel en‐gines, due to the rapid heating ofthe glow plug system.

NoticeIf the wait-to-start light stays on afterstarting the vehicle, the vehicle maynot run properly. Have the vehicleserviced right away.3. If the engine does not start after

15 seconds of cranking, turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.Wait one minute for the starter tocool, then try the same stepsagain.

If you are trying to start the engine af‐ter you have run out of fuel, follow thesteps in Running Out of Fuel3 8-35 .When the engine is cold, let it run fora few minutes before you move thevehicle. This lets oil pressure build up.The engine will sound louder when it'scold.NoticeIf you are not in an idling vehicle andthe engine overheats, you would notbe there to see the overheated en‐gine indication. This could damagethe vehicle. Do not let the engine runwhen you are not in the vehicle.


If the Diesel Engine Will Not StartIf you have run out of fuel, look atRunning Out of Fuel 3 8-35 . SeeFuel for Diesel Engines 3 8-34 .If the vehicle is not out of fuel, and theengine will not start, do this:Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. Im‐mediately after the wait-to-start lightgoes off, turn the ignition key toSTART.If the light does not go off, wait a fewseconds, then try starting the engineagain. See your dealer as soon asyou can for a starting system check.If the light comes on and then goes offand you know the battery is charged,but the engine still will not start, thevehicle needs service.If the light does not come on when theengine is cold, the vehicle needsservice.If the battery does not have enoughcharge to start the engine, seeBattery 3 9-21 .

Be sure you have the right oil for theengine, and that you have changedthe oil at the proper times. If you usethe wrong oil, the engine may beharder to start.Be sure you are using the proper fuelfor existing weather conditions. SeeFuel for Diesel Engines 3 8-34 .If the engine starts, runs a short time,then stops, the vehicle needs service.

9 Warning

Do not use gasoline or startingaids, such as ether, in the air in‐take. They could damage the en‐gine. There could also be a fire,which could cause serious per‐sonal injury.

Retained Accessory Power(RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after the ig‐nition key is turned to the LOCK/OFFposition:■ Outside Mirror■ Power Windows■ Sunroof (if equipped)■ RadioThe outside mirror, power windows,and sunroof will function until a dooris opened.The radio will function until the driverdoor is opened.If no door is opened after the ignitionkey is turned to the LOCK/OFF posi‐tion, all accessories will be turned offafter 10 minutes.


Shifting Into Park

9 Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine run‐ning, the vehicle can move sud‐denly. You or others could be in‐jured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pullinga trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips3 8-37 .

Use this procedure to shift into P (Park):1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 3 8-26 formore information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

9 Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you leave the vehiclewith the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parking brakeset.Release the button and check that theshift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park).

Torque LockTorque lock is when the weight of thevehicle puts too much force on theparking pawl in the transmission. Thishappens when parking on a hill andshifting the transmission into P (Park)is not done properly and then it is dif‐ficult to shift out of P (Park). To pre‐vent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park). Tofind out how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.If torque lock does occur, the vehiclemay need to be pushed uphill by an‐other vehicle to relieve the parkingpawl pressure, so you can shift out ofP (Park).


Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with an elec‐tronic shift lock release system. Theshift lock release is designed to:■ Prevent ignition key removal unless

the shift lever is in P (Park) with theshift lever button fully released.

■ Prevent movement of the shift leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition isin ON/RUN and the brake pedal isapplied.

The shift lock release is always func‐tional except in the case of an un‐charged or low voltage (less than 9-volt) battery.If the vehicle has an uncharged bat‐tery or a battery with low voltage, trycharging or jump starting the battery.See Jump Starting 3 9-63To shift out of P (Park):1. Apply the brake pedal.2. Press the shift lever button.3. Move the shift lever to the desired

position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):1. Fully release the shift lever button.2. Hold the brake pedal down and

press the shift lever button again.3. Move the shift lever to the desired

position.If the shift lever still cannot be movedfrom P (Park), see “Shift Lock ManualRelease.”

Shift Lock Manual Release7-Passenger Left-Hand Drive Shown,Right-Hand Drive SimilarThe vehicle may have a Shift LockManual Release system. If you can‐not shift out of P (Park) with the igni‐tion in ON/RUN and the brake pedalapplied:1. Turn the ignition off and remove

the key.2. Hold the brake pedal down.

3. Remove the mat from the bottomof the storage area in front of theshifter.


4. Press and hold the shift lock re‐lease button in the floor of the stor‐age area.

5. Shift to N (Neutral).6. Reinstall the mat.7. Start the engine and shift into the

gear you want.8. Have the vehicle repaired as soon

as possible.

Parking over Things That Burn

9 Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehi‐cle and ignite. Do not park overpapers, leaves, dry grass, or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

9 Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:■ The vehicle idles in areas with

poor ventilation (parking ga‐rages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow ortail pipes).

■ The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

■ The exhaust system leaks dueto corrosion or damage.

■ The vehicle exhaust system hasbeen modified, damaged or im‐properly repaired.

■ There are holes or openings inthe vehicle body from damageor after market modificationsthat are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:■ Drive it only with the windows

completely down.■ Have the vehicle repaired imme‐

diately.Never park the vehicle with the en‐gine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

Diesel Particulate FilterThe Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) isdesigned to reduce hydrocarbons(HC) and carbon monoxide (CO)emissions and to collect particulatesfrom the engine exhaust to minimizedischarge of soot to the atmosphere.The soot particles accumulate in thechannels of the coated diesel filterand are burnt off at regular intervals,


through a process called “regenera‐tion”, to prevent filter clogging. SeeDiesel Particulate Filter Light 3 5-23for more information. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) will come on toindicate that there is a malfunction inthe DPF.NoticeEngine performance can be reducedwhen excess soot has accumulatedin the DPF. If this happens, youshould see your dealer immediately.

9 Warning

During DPF self cleaning or duringextended idling in P (Park), the ex‐haust system and exhaust gasesare very hot. Things that burncould touch hot exhaust parts un‐der the vehicle and ignite. You orothers could be burned. Do notpark, or idle for an extended periodof time, near or over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn. Keep the exhaustarea clear of material that could ig‐nite or burn. See Parking overThings That Burn \3 8-20 for moreinformation.

Running the Vehicle WhileParkedIt is better not to park with the enginerunning. But if you ever have to, hereare some things to know.

9 Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation is dan‐gerous. Engine exhaust may enterthe vehicle. Engine exhaust con‐tains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. Never run the enginein an enclosed area that has nofresh air ventilation. For more in‐formation, see Engine Exhaust3 8-20 .


9 Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatic trans‐mission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmlyset. The vehicle can roll. Do notleave the vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. Tobe sure the vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly levelground, always set the parkingbrake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be sure thevehicle will not move. See ShiftingInto Park 3 8-18.If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer,see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 3 8-37 .

Automatic TransmissionThe shift lever is located on the con‐sole between the seats.

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.P (Park): This position locks the frontwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.

9 Warning

It is dangerous to get out of the ve‐hicle if the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the engine run‐ning, the vehicle can move sud‐denly. You or others could be in‐jured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark 3 8-18 . If you are pullinga trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips3 8-37 .


Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. Thevehicle has an automatic transmis‐sion shift lock control system. Theregular brakes must be applied firstand then the shift lever buttonpressed before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shiftingout of Park 3 8-19 .R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

NoticeShifting to R (Reverse) while the ve‐hicle is moving forward could dam‐age the transmission. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see If theVehicle Is Stuck 3 8-9 .

N (Neutral): In this position, the en‐gine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral)when the vehicle is being towed.

9 Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, the ve‐hicle could move very rapidly. Youcould lose control and hit people orobjects. Do not shift into a drivegear while the engine is running athigh speed.

NoticeShifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral)with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmis‐sion. The repairs would not be cov‐ered by the vehicle warranty. Besure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normaldriving, and allows the transmissionto shift into all forward gears. It pro‐vides the best fuel economy.

Downshifting the transmission in slip‐pery road conditions could result inskidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 3 8-5 .NoticeSpinning the tires or holding the ve‐hicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair will notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.


Manual ModeManual Shift Mode (MSM)(Automatic Transmission)To use this feature, if equipped, dothe following:1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive)

into the manual gate.2. Push the shift lever forward to‐

ward the plus (+) to upshift or rear‐ward toward the minus (−) todownshift.

In manual shift mode all forwardgears can be selected.While using the MSM feature the ve‐hicle will have operation similar toa manual transmission. You can usethis for sport driving or when drivinghilly roads to stay in gear longer or todownshift for more power or for en‐gine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed:■ The transmission will not automati‐

cally shift to the next higher gearwithout moving the shift lever.

■ The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear if thevehicle speed is too high.

2 (Second) Gear Start FeatureWhen accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to select 2 (Second)gear. A higher gear, and light appli‐cation of the gas pedal, may allow youto gain more traction on slippery sur‐faces.With the Manual Shift Mode, the ve‐hicle can accelerate from a stop in 2 (Second).

1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive)into the manual gate.

2. With the vehicle stopped, movethe shift lever forward to select 2 (Second). The vehicle will startfrom a stop position in 2 (Second).

3. Once the vehicle is moving, selectthe desired drive gear or move theshift lever to the D (Drive) position.

Fuel Economy ModeThe vehicle may have a fuel economymode. When engaged, fuel economymode can improve the vehicle's fueleconomy.

Pressing the eco button by the shiftlever will engage fuel economy mode.When activated, the eco light in theinstrument cluster will come on. See


Fuel Economy Light 3 5-25 . Pressingthe button a second time will turn fueleconomy mode off.When fuel economy mode is on:■ The transmission will upshift

sooner, and downshift later.■ The torque converter will lock–up

sooner, and stay on longer.■ The gas pedal will be less sensitive.■ The vehicle's computers will more

aggressively shut off fuel to the en‐gine under deceleration.

Do not use fuel economy mode whiletowing.

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all four wheels.It is fully automatic, and adjusts itselfas needed for road conditions.When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the system automat‐ically detects the compact spare anddisables AWD. To restore AWD op‐eration and prevent excessive wearon the system, replace the compactspare with a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tire3 9-63 for more information.

BrakesAntilock Brake System (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced elec‐tronic braking system that helps pre‐vent a braking skid.When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it might evenbe noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light3 5-20 .If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to avoid


a sudden obstacle, a computersenses that the wheels are slowingdown. If one of the wheels is about tostop rolling, the computer will sepa‐rately work the brakes at each wheel.ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.As the brakes are applied, the com‐puter keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up to thebrake pedal or always decrease stop‐ping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, there willnot be enough time to apply thebrakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let ABSwork. You might hear the ABS pumpor motor operating and feel the brakepedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.

Parking BrakeSeven Passenger

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for the EPBis in the center console. The EPB canalways be activated, even if the igni‐tion is OFF. To prevent draining thebattery, avoid repeated cycles of theEPB system when the engine is notrunning.The system has a parking brake sta‐tus light and a parking brake warninglight. See Electric Parking BrakeLight 3 5-20 . In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.Before leaving the vehicle, check theparking brake status lamp to insurethe parking brake is applied.

EPB ApplyThe EPB can be applied any time thevehicle is stopped. The EPB is ap‐plied by momentarily lifting up on theEPB switch. Once fully applied, theparking brake status light will be on.While the brake is being applied, thestatus lamp will flash until full apply isreached. If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, you need to have


the vehicle serviced. Do not drive thevehicle if the parking brake statuslight is flashing. See your dealer. SeeElectric Parking Brake Light 3 5-20for more information.If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis in motion, a chime will sound. Thevehicle will decelerate as long as theswitch is held in the up position. Re‐leasing the EPB switch during the de‐celeration will release the parkingbrake. If the switch is held in the upposition until the vehicle comes toa stop, the EPB will remain applied.If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB is onlypartially applied or released, or thereis a problem with the EPB. If this lightflashes continuously, release theEPB, and attempt to apply it again. Ifthis light continues to flash, do notdrive the vehicle. See your dealer.If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operating withreduced functionality. To apply theEPB when this light is on, lift up on theEPB switch and hold it in the up posi‐

tion. Full application of the parkingbrake by the EPB system may takea longer period of time than normalwhen this light is on. Continue to holdthe switch until the parking brake sta‐tus light remains on. If the parkingbrake warning light is on, see yourdealer.If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked to preventvehicle movement.

EPB ReleaseTo release the EPB, place the ignitionin the ON/RUN position, apply andhold the brake pedal, and push downmomentarily on the EPB switch. If youattempt to release the EPB withoutthe brake pedal applied, a chime willsound and the press brake pedal lightwill appear. The EPB is releasedwhen the parking brake status light isoff.If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operating withreduced functionality. To release theEPB when this light is on, push downon the EPB switch and hold it in the

down position. EPB release may takea longer period of time than normalwhen this light is on. Continue to holdthe switch until the parking brake sta‐tus light is off. If the light is on, seeyour dealer.NoticeDriving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is off be‐fore driving.

Automatic EPB ReleaseThe EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve park‐ing brake lining life.


Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assist fea‐ture designed to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehicle speedin emergency driving conditions. Thisfeature uses the stability system hy‐draulic brake control module to sup‐plement the power brake system un‐der conditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brake con‐trol module increases brake pressureat each corner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedal pul‐sation or pedal movement during thistime is normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature will automaticallydisengage when the brake pedal isreleased or brake pedal pressure isquickly decreased.

Ride Control SystemsElectronic Stability Control(ESC)The vehicle has an Electronic Stabil‐ity Control (ESC) system which com‐bines antilock brake, traction, andstability control systems and helpsthe driver maintain directional controlof the vehicle in most driving condi‐tions.ESC activates when the computersenses a discrepancy between the in‐tended path and the direction the ve‐hicle is actually traveling. ESC selec‐tively applies braking pressure at anyone of the vehicle's brakes to assistthe driver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.When the vehicle is started and be‐gins to move, the system performsseveral diagnostic checks to insurethere are no problems. The systemmay be heard or felt while it is work‐ing. This is normal and does not meanthere is a problem with the vehicle.

This light on the instrument panelcluster will flash when ESC is both onand activated.If the system fails to turn on or acti‐vate, this light will be on solid. Whenthe light is on solid, the system will notassist the driver in maintaining direc‐tional control of the vehicle. Adjustyour driving accordingly.ESC may also turn off automatically ifit determines that a problem existswith the system. The ESC warninglight will be on solid to warn the driverthat ESC is disabled and requiresservice. If the problem does not clearitself after restarting the vehicle, seeyour dealer for service.


The ESC can be turned off or on bypressing and releasing g on the in‐strument panel.

The ESC Off light turns on solid whenthe system has been turned off.It is recommended to leave the sys‐tem on for normal driving conditions,but it may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice, or snow, and youwant to “rock” the vehicle to attemptto free it.If cruise control is being used whenESC activates, the cruise control au‐tomatically disengages. The cruise

control can be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Control3 8-31 .

Traction Control System (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road con‐ditions. The system operates only if itsenses that any of the drive wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose trac‐tion. When this happens, TCS appliesthe brakes to limit wheel spin and alsoreduces engine power. The systemmay be heard or felt while it is work‐ing, but this is normal.

Active Rollover ProtectionThis function is part of the ESC sys‐tem. When the vehicle moves in anextremely unstable manner, this func‐tion helps the vehicle maintain normalstability.

Descent Control System(DCS)The Descent Control System allowsthe vehicle to travel at a low speedwithout applying the brake.

The vehicle will automatically decel‐erate to a low speed and remain therewhen DCS is turned on.Use only when descending steepgrades while driving off-road. Do notuse when driving on normal road sur‐faces.Some noise or vibration from thebrake system may be heard or feltwhen DCS is active. This is normal.

Turn the system on by pressing theDCS button located on the instrumentpanel. The green DCS light comes onsteady when the system is on.


The green DCS light flashes on theinstrument panel while driving atspeeds below 50 km/h (30 mph) toshow the system is operating.DCS will not activate at speeds above50 km/h (30 mph), even if the button ispressed.Notice■ DCS is designed for driving down

steep off-road hills.■ Unnecessary use of DCS can

cause malfunctions in the brakesystem or ESC.

To turn the system off, press the DCSbutton again and the DCS light turnsoff. Applying the brake or acceleratorwill also cause DCS to turn off.The amber DCS light flashes whenthe system is not ready due to hightemperature through severe or repea‐ted braking. The light will turn offwhen the system cools.The amber DCS light comes onsteady if there is a system malfunc‐tion.

NoticeIf the amber Descent Control Sys‐tem Light comes on and stays on,the system is malfunctioning. Seeyour dealer for service.

Limited-Slip DifferentialVehicles with a limited-slip differentialcan give more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works likea standard differential most of thetime, but when traction is low, this fea‐ture allows the drive wheel with themost traction to move the vehicle.

Continuous Damping Control(CDC)The Continuous Damping Control(CDC) feature provides superior ve‐hicle ride and handling under a varietyof passenger and loading conditions.The system is fully automatic anduses a computer controller to contin‐uously monitor vehicle speed, wheelto body position, lift/dive, and steeringposition of the vehicle. The controllerthen sends signals to each shock ab‐

sorber to independently adjust thedamping level to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Automatic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of the ve‐hicle level as the load changes. Thesystem is automatic and no adjust‐ments are necessary.


Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control,a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator.Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 40 km/h (25 mph).When the brakes are applied, or thecancel button pressed, the cruisecontrol turns off.If the vehicle is in cruise control whenthe traction control system, if equip‐ped, begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control automatically disen‐gages. The cruise control can beturned back on, when road conditionsare safe again.

9 Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons are locatedon the right side of the steering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruisecontrol on or off.RES/+ (Accelerate/Resume): Pressto make the vehicle resume to a pre‐viously set speed or accelerate.SET/- (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control ormake the vehicle decelerate.Q (Cancel): Press to disengage thecruise control without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise ControlIf the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.1. Press J to turn cruise control on.2. Get up to the speed desired.3. Press SET/- and release it. The

cruise control light comes on inthe instrument panel cluster toshow that the cruise control is on.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.


Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are ap‐plied, or Q is pressed, the cruise con‐trol is disengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.Once the vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, briefly pressRES/+. The vehicle returns to the pre‐viously set speed and stays there.If RES/+ is held, the vehicle speedcontinues to increase until the buttonis released, the brake pedal is ap‐plied, or Q is pressed. Do not hold inthe RES/+ button, unless you wantthe vehicle to go faster.Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

■ Use the accelerator pedal to get toa higher speed. Press SET/-, thenrelease the button and the acceler‐ator pedal.

■ Press and hold the RES/+ until thedesired speed is reached, and thenrelease it.

■ To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, briefly press RES/+and then release it. Each time thisis done, the vehicle goes about 2 km/h (1.2 mph) faster.

The accelerate feature only works af‐ter the cruise control is turned on bypressing SET/-.Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:■ Press SET/- until the lower speed

desired is reached, then release it.■ To decrease the vehicle speed in

small amounts, briefly press SET/- .Each time this is done, the vehiclegoes about 2 km/h (1.2 mph)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you takeyour foot off the pedal, the vehicle willslow down to the previously set cruisecontrol speed.Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works onhills depends upon the vehicle speed,load, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, you mighthave to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed. Whengoing downhill, you might have tobrake or shift to a lower gear to keepthe vehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.Disengaging Cruise ControlThere are two ways to end cruise con‐trol:■ Step lightly on the brake pedal or

press the clutch pedal, if you havea manual transmission.

■ Press Q .■ Press J .


Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory by pressing J or if thevehicle is turned off.

Object DetectionSystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist(UD7 - For Vehicles with3 Sensors)The parking assistance system aidsthe driver during backward movementof the vehicle by chiming if any objectis sensed behind the vehicle.This system is turned on wheneverthe ignition switch is ON and thetransmission is shifted to R (Reverse).The chime sounds once when shiftingto R (Reverse). This indicates a nor‐mal condition. If there are severalchimes when shifting to reverse,there is a malfunction with the systemand the warning light can come on. Ifthis happens, consult your dealer torepair the problem as soon as possi‐ble.

You can figure out the distance be‐tween your vehicle and obstacles us‐ing the chime. The closer the vehicleis to an object the faster the chime willsound. If the distance is less than 30- 40 cm, the signal will be continuous.


FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the proper mainte‐nance of this vehicle, keeps the en‐gine clean, and maintains optimumvehicle performance.

Fuel for Petrol EnginesCommercially available high-qualityfuels are suitable. Fuel quality hasa decisive influence on the power out‐put, driveability and life of the engine.The additives contained in the fuelplay an important role in this regard.You should therefore use only high-quality fuels containing additives. Pet‐rol with too low an octane number cancause pinging and resulting damage.Petrol with a higher octane numbercan always be used. A dispensingpump for leaded fuel cannot be inser‐ted in the fuel tank of a vehicle thatmust be operated on unleaded fuelonly. Use of petrol with an octane rat‐ing of 95 will ensure economical driv‐ing.

Fuel for Diesel EnginesDiesel engines must be operated onlyon commercially available diesel fuelmeeting the specifications of DIN EN590. Marine diesel fuel, fuel oils, die‐sel fuels, which are entirely or partiallyplant based such as rape seed oil orbio-diesel, Aquazole and similar die‐sel-water emulsions must not beused. The flow and filterability of die‐sel fuels are insufficient at low tem‐peratures, as a result of crystallizedparaffins. Diesel fuels with improvedlow-temperature properties are there‐fore available on the market duringthe winter months. Make sure thatyou use winter fuel before the start ofthe cold weather season. Use of die‐sel fuels with manufacturer guaran‐teed winter properties eliminates theneed for additives.

Water in FuelDrain diesel fuel filter of residual wa‐ter at every engine oil change.1. Place a container underneath the

filter housing.

2. Turn drain plug, located on the leftof the filter housing, counter-clockwise using a suitable screw‐driver, to drain off the water. Thefilter is drained as soon as dieselfuel emerges from the port.

3. Retighten the drain plug by turn‐ing it clockwise.

4. With engine switched off, turn ig‐nition key to ON, wait approx.5 seconds, and turn key to LOCKto perform priming operation. Per‐form this operation 3 times ormore while the engine is switchedoff, to avoid air entering the fuelline.

Check diesel fuel filter at shorter in‐tervals if the vehicle is subjected toextreme operating conditions such ashigh humidity (primarily in coastalareas), extremely high or low outsidetemperatures and substantially vary‐ing daytime and nighttime tempera‐tures. If there is water in the diesel fuelfilter, a warning light illuminates in theinstrument panel. See Water in FuelWarning Light (Diesel Only) 3 5-25 .Drain the water immediately.


Running Out of FuelRunning out of diesel fuel requires pri‐ming after fuel is added.With engine switched off, turn ignitionkey to ON, wait approx. 5 seconds,and turn key to LOCK to perform pri‐ming operation. Perform this opera‐tion 3 times or more while the engineis switched off, to avoid air enteringthe fuel line.

Filling the Tank

9 Warning

Fuel vapor burns violently anda fuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all the in‐structions on the fuel pump island.Turn off the engine when refuel‐ing. Do not smoke near fuel orwhen refueling the vehicle. Do notuse cellular phones. Keep sparks,flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave thefuel pump unattended when refu‐eling the vehicle. This is againstthe law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumpingfuel. Keep children away from thefuel pump; never let children pumpfuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located be‐hind a hinged fuel door on the driverside of the vehicle. The fuel door canbe unlocked by pressing the door un‐

lock button on the remote control orpressing the lock switch in the driver'sdoor.To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap hasa spring in it; if the cap is released toosoon, it will spring back to the right.While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on the fueldoor.When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks, otherwise theMalfunction Indicator Lamp may turnon. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp3 5-17 .

9 Warning

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. Ifyou spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hissnoise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.


Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not topoff or overfill the tank and wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Care3 9-69.When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make sure thecap is fully installed. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly instal‐led. This would allow fuel to evapo‐rate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17 .

9 Warning

If a fire starts while you are refuel‐ing, do not remove the nozzle.Shut off the flow of fuel by shuttingoff the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the areaimmediately.

NoticeIf a new fuel cap is needed, be sureto get the right type of cap from yourdealer. The wrong type of fuel capmight not fit properly, might causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fuel tankand emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17 .

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

9 Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from the con‐tainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:■ Dispense fuel only into ap‐

proved containers.■ Do not fill a container while it is

inside a vehicle, in a vehicle'strunk, pickup bed, or on any sur‐face other than the ground.

■ Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fill openingbefore operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

■ Do not smoke while pumpingfuel.

■ Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


TowingGeneral Towing InformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Con‐tact your dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehiclefor towing a trailer.See the following trailer towing infor‐mation in this section:■ For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “Driving Char‐acteristics and Towing Tips.”

■ For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

■ For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “Towing Equip‐ment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle3 9-66 . For information on towingthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing3 9-66.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

9 Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correct equip‐ment is not used or the vehicle isnot driven properly. For example,if the trailer is too heavy, thebrakes may not work well — oreven at all. The driver and passen‐gers could be seriously injured.The vehicle may also be dam‐aged; the resulting repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle war‐ranty. Pull a trailer only if all thesteps in this section have been fol‐lowed. Ask your dealer for adviceand information about towinga trailer with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailer tow‐ing equipment. To identify the trailer‐ing capacity of the vehicle, see TrailerTowing 3 8-40 . Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking, dura‐bility, and fuel economy. With the

added weight, the engine, transmis‐sion, wheel assemblies, and tires areforced to work harder and undergreater loads. The trailer also addswind resistance, increasing the pull‐ing requirements. For safe trailering,correctly use the proper traileringequipment.The following information has impor‐tant trailering tips and rules for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Read this section carefully beforepulling a trailer.

Pulling a TrailerHere are some important points:■ There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that apply totrailering. Check for legal require‐ments.

■ Do not tow a trailer at all during thefirst 1 600 km (1,000 miles) the newvehicle is driven. The engine, axle,or other parts could be damaged.


■ During the first 800 km (500 miles)that a trailer is towed, do not driveover 80 km/h (50 mph) and do notmake starts at full throttle. Thisreduces wear on the vehicle.

■ Vehicles with automatic transmis‐sions can tow in D (Drive) butM (Manual Mode) is recommended.See Manual Mode 3 8-24 for moreinformation. Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often. Forvehicles with a manual transmis‐sion, it is better not to use the high‐est gear.

■ Use the cruise control when towing.■ Turn off the fuel economy mode

(ECO) when towing.■ Obey speed limit restrictions. Do

not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or nomore than 90 km/h (55 mph), to re‐duce wear on the vehicle.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling and brakingwith the added trailer weight. The ve‐hicle is now longer and not as respon‐sive as the vehicle is by itself.Check all trailer hitch parts and at‐tachments, safety chains, electricalconnectors, lamps, tires, and mirroradjustments. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start the vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailerbrake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working.During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystemWhen towing, the sound of the stabil‐ity control system might be heard.The system is reacting to the vehiclemovement caused by the trailer,which mainly occurs during cornering.This is normal when towing heaviertrailers.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situations thatrequire heavy braking and suddenturns.

PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because the rigis longer, it is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehicle be‐fore returning to the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move thetrailer to the left, move that hand to theleft. To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.


Making TurnsNoticeMaking very sharp turns while trai‐lering could cause the trailer to comein contact with the vehicle. The ve‐hicle could be damaged. Avoid mak‐ing very sharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer won't strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or other ob‐jects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu‐vers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towinga TrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning, chang‐ing lanes, or stopping.When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing the sig‐

nal when they are not. It is importantto check occasionally to be sure thetrailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If the transmissionis not shifted down, the brakes mighthave to be used so much that theywould get hot and no longer work well.Vehicles with an automatic transmis‐sion can tow in D (Drive) but M (Man‐ual Mode) is recommended. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.For vehicles with a manual transmis‐sion, it is better not to use the highestgear.When towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, consider the following:Engine coolant will boil at a lower tem‐perature than at normal altitudes. Ifthe engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine run while

parked, preferably on level ground,with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turn‐ing the engine off. For vehicles withmanual transmissions, let the enginerun while parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission out ofgear and the parking brake applied,for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheating3 9-17 .

Parking on Hills

9 Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can be danger‐ous. If something goes wrong, therig could start to move. People canbe injured, and both the vehicleand the trailer can be damaged.When possible, always park the rigon a flat surface.


If parking the rig on a hill:1. Press the brake pedal, but do not

shift into P (Park) yet for vehicleswith an automatic transmission, orinto gear for vehicles with a man‐ual transmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhill orinto traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocks un‐der the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedal un‐til the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:◆ Start the engine.◆ Shift into a gear.◆ Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear

of the chocks.4. Stop and have someone pick up

and store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service more oftenwhen pulling a trailer. See the Main‐tenance Schedule booklet for moreinformation. Things that are espe‐cially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling sys‐tem, and brake system. It is a goodidea to inspect these before and dur‐ing the trip.Check periodically to see that all hitchnuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating3 9-17 .

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there are threeimportant considerations that have todo with weight:■ The weight of the trailer■ The weight of the trailer tongue■ The total weight on the vehicle's

tires


Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTiresBe sure the vehicle's tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on the Certifi‐cation label or see Vehicle LoadLimits 3 8-10 for more information.Make sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, in‐cluding the weight of the trailertongue. If using a weight distributinghitch, make sure not to go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?It depends on how the rig is used. Forexample, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and howmuch the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It can de‐pend on any special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. SeeWeight of the Trailer Tongue3 8-42later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in the towvehicle and it has all the required trai‐lering equipment. The weight of addi‐tional optional equipment, passen‐gers and cargo in the tow vehiclemust be subtracted from the maxi‐mum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.

Vehicle

MaximumTrailerWeight GCWR*

2.0L L4Engine RPOLPN,AutomaticTransmission,5 Passenger

Without TrailerBrake

750 kg(1,653lbs)

4 015 kg(8,852lbs)

With TrailerBrake

1 700 kg(3,748lbs)

4 015 kg(8,852lbs)

2.4L L4Engine RPOLE9,AutomaticTransmission,7 Passenger


Vehicle

MaximumTrailerWeight GCWR*

Without TrailerBrake

750 kg(1,653lbs)

AWD:3 905 kg(8,609lbs)FWD:3 840 kg(8,466lbs)

With TrailerBrake

1,500 kg(3,307lbs)

AWD:3 905 kg(8,609lbs)FWD:3 840 kg(8,466lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rat‐ing (GCWR) is the total allowableweight of the completely loaded vehi‐cle and trailer including any passen‐gers, cargo, equipment and conver‐sions. The GCWR for the vehicleshould not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer for our trailering in‐formation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is animportant weight to measure becauseit affects the total gross weight of thevehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle. If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, thetongue load must be added to theGVW because the vehicle will be car‐rying that weight, too. See VehicleLoad Limits 3 8-10 for more informa‐tion about the vehicle's maximumload capacity.

If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch is being used, thetrailer tongue (A) should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue, sepa‐rately, to see if the weights are proper.If they are not, adjustments might bemade by moving some items aroundin the trailer.Trailering may be limited by the vehi‐cle's ability to carry tongue weight.Tongue weight cannot cause the ve‐hicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Ve‐hicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR


(Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). Theeffect of additional weight may reducethe trailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.It is important that the vehicle doesnot exceed any of its ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, MaximumTrailer Rating or Tongue Weight. Theonly way to be sure it is not exceedingany of these ratings is to weigh thevehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTiresBe sure the vehicle's tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on the Certifi‐cation label or see Vehicle LoadLimits 3 8-10 for more information.Make sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, in‐cluding the weight of the trailertongue. If using a weight distributinghitch, make sure not to go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing EquipmentHitchesIt is important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by and rough roads are a fewreasons why the right hitch is needed.■ The rear bumper on the vehicle is

not intended for hitches. Do not at‐tach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attachto the bumper.

■ Will any holes be made in the bodyof the vehicle when the trailer hitchis installed? If there are, then besure to seal the holes later when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from the ex‐haust can get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust 3 8-20 .

Installing the Hitch1. Remove the hitch cover and store

it a safe place.


2. Make sure the hitch is ready to beinstalled.

◆ Insert the hitch locking key (D)into the hitch lock (C).

◆ Rotate the key down to the un‐lock position. The indicator onthe hitch should be red (A).

◆ There is a gap between theknob and the hitch (B).

3. Insert the hitch (C) upward into thereceiver (A) until the pins (B) onthe hitch are in the retainer of thehitch receiver.

4. Push forward and down on thehitch (C) until the hitch is en‐gaged, and latches into place.The indicator on the hitch will turngreen (B) and the pins on the hitch(D) will be seated in the retainer ofthe receiver (A).

5. Rotate the locking key up to thelock the hitch into place and re‐move the hitch locking key.


Check that the hitch is correctly in‐stalled:■ The indicator on the hitch is green■ There is no gap between the pins

on the hitch and the retainer on thereceiver.

■ The hitch is seated firmly in the re‐ceiver.

■ The key is locked in the up position.■ Key is removed from the hitch.Removing the Hitch

1. Insert the hitch locking key into thehitch lock.

2. Turn the key down to the unlockposition.

3. Push in on the locking lever thehitch.

4. Rotate the lever forward 1/4 turn.

5. Lift up and pull outward to removethe hitch from the receiver.

6. Insert the hitch cover into the re‐ceiver housing.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between the ve‐hicle and the trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailerto help prevent the tongue from con‐tacting the road if it becomes separa‐ted from the hitch. Always leave justenough slack so the rig can turn.Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesA loaded trailer that weighs more than450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to have itsown brake system that is adequate forthe weight of the trailer. Be sure toread and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so they are installed,adjusted, and maintained properly.Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring HarnessAll of the electrical circuits required forthe trailer lighting system can be ac‐cessed at the driver side rear lamp


connector. This connector is locatedunder the carpet at the rear corner ofthe cargo compartment.

The trailer indicator light comes onwhen a trailer is connected to the ve‐hicle. It goes out again when thetrailer is disconnected.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Con‐trol (TSC) feature as part of the Elec‐tronic Stability Control (ESC) system.If while towing, the system detectsthat the trailer is swaying, the vehi‐cle's brakes are applied without thedriver pressing the brake pedal.

When TSC is applying the brakes, theESC indicator light flashes to notifythe driver to reduce speed. SeeElectronic Stability Control (ESC)Indicator Light 3 5-22 . If the trailercontinues to sway, ESC will reduceengine torque to help slow the vehi‐cle.TSC will not function if ESC is turnedoff.

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNoticeDo not add anything electrical to thevehicle unless you check with yourdealer first. Some electrical equip‐ment can damage the vehicle andthe damage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as theyshould.

Add-on equipment can drain the ve‐hicle's 12-volt battery, even if the ve‐hicle is not operating.The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 3 3-29and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 3 3-30 .

Vehicle Care 9-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information ................. 9-2Accessories and

Modifications ......................... 9-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own Service

Work ..................................... 9-3Hood ......................................... 9-3Engine Compartment

Overview (2.0L RHD) ............ 9-4Engine Compartment

Overview (2.4L RHD) ............ 9-6Engine Oil ................................. 9-7Engine Oil Life System ........... 9-10Automatic Transmission

Fluid .................................... 9-11Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ........ 9-13Engine Coolant (2.0L and

2.4L L4 Engines) ................. 9-14Engine Overheating ............... 9-17Power Steering Fluid .............. 9-18Washer Fluid .......................... 9-19Brakes .................................... 9-19Brake Fluid ............................. 9-20Battery .................................... 9-21

All-Wheel Drive ...................... 9-22Rear Axle ............................... 9-22Starter Switch Check .............. 9-22Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control FunctionCheck .................................. 9-23

Ignition Transmission LockCheck .................................. 9-23

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check .............. 9-23

Wiper Blade Replacement ..... 9-24

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ................... 9-25

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement .................. 9-27Halogen Bulbs ........................ 9-27High Intensity Discharge

(HID) Lighting ...................... 9-27Headlamps, Front Turn

Signal and ParkingLamps ................................. 9-27

Fog Lamps ............................. 9-29Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps ................................. 9-30

License Plate Lamp ................ 9-30Replacement Bulbs ................ 9-31

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload .... 9-31Fuses and Circuit Breakers .... 9-31Engine Compartment Fuse

Block ................................... 9-32Instrument Panel Fuse

Block ................................... 9-35

Wheels and TiresTires ....................................... 9-39Winter Tires ............................ 9-39Tire Pressure .......................... 9-40Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation ............................... 9-42Tire Pressure Monitor

System ................................ 9-43Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation ............................ 9-44Tire Inspection ........................ 9-44Tire Rotation (Long Wheel

Base) .................................. 9-45When It Is Time for New

Tires .................................... 9-45Buying New Tires ................... 9-46Different Size Tires and

Wheels ................................ 9-46Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance ............................... 9-47Wheel Replacement ............... 9-47Tire Chains ............................. 9-48

9-2 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat .................. 9-48Tire Sealant and Compressor

Kit ........................................ 9-50Storing the Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ................... 9-56Tire Changing ......................... 9-56Compact Spare Tire ............... 9-63

Jump StartingJump Starting ......................... 9-63

TowingTowing the Vehicle ................. 9-66Recreational Vehicle

Towing ................................ 9-66

Appearance CareExterior Care .......................... 9-69Interior Care ........................... 9-72Floor Mats .............................. 9-74

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine partsand trained and supported servicepeople.

Accessories and ModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as air‐bags, braking, stability, ride and han‐dling, emissions systems, aerody‐namics, durability, and electronic sys‐tems like antilock brakes, tractioncontrol, and stability control. Theseaccessories or modifications couldeven cause malfunction or damagenot covered by the vehicle warranty.Damage to vehicle components re‐sulting from modifications or the in‐stallation or use of non-company cer‐tified parts, including control moduleor software modifications, is not cov‐ered under the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

Accessories from your dealer are de‐signed to complement and functionwith other systems on the vehicle.Your dealer can accessorize the ve‐hicle using genuine accessories.When you go to your dealer and askfor accessories, you will know thatcompany-trained and supported serv‐ice technicians will perform the workusing genuine accessories.

Vehicle Care 9-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own Service Work

9 Warning

You can be injured and the vehiclecould be damaged if you try to doservice work on a vehicle withoutknowing enough about it.■ Be sure you have sufficient

knowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting any ve‐hicle maintenance task.

■ Be sure to use the proper nuts,bolts, and other fasteners. Met‐ric and English fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. You couldbe hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck 3 3-30 .Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed.

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with this symbol onit. It is located under the instru‐ment panel on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicleand lift up on the secondary hoodrelease lever.

3. Lift the hood.Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenpull the hood down and close it firmly.

9-4 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD)

Vehicle Care 9-5

2.0 L L4 Engine 7–Pass.A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3 9-13.B. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See

Brakes 3 9-19.C. Clutch Fluid Reservoir.D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine

Oil 3 9-7 .E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine

Oil 3 9-7 .

F. Auxiliary Engine CompartmentFuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block3 9-32 .

G. Fuel Filter.H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.

See Power SteeringFluid3 9-18 .

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andCap. See Engine Coolant (2.0Land 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 .

J. Engine Compartment Fuse Block3 9-32 .

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser‐voir. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 .

L. Battery 3 9-21 .

9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)

Vehicle Care 9-7

2.4 L L4 EngineA. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3 9-13 .B. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See

Brakes 3 9-19 .C. Clutch Fluid Reservoir.D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine

Oil 3 9-7.E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine

Oil 3 9-7.F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.

See Power Steering Fluid3 9-18.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andCap. See Engine Coolant (2.0Land 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 .

H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block3 9-32.

I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser‐voir. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19.

J. Battery 3 9-21 .

Engine OilTo ensure proper engine perform‐ance and long life, careful attentionmust be paid to engine oil. Followingthese simple, but important steps willhelp protect your investment:■ Always use engine oil approved to

the proper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See “Se‐lecting the Right Engine Oil” in thissection.

■ Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” in thissection.

■ Change the engine oil at the appro‐priate time. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 3 9-10 .

■ Always dispose of engine oil prop‐erly. See “What to Do with Used Oil”in this section.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order to getan accurate reading, the vehicle mustbe on level ground. The engine oil

dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview (2.0LRHD) 3 9-4 Engine CompartmentOverview (2.4L RHD) 3 9-6 for the lo‐cation of the engine oil dipstick.Obtaining an accurate oil level read‐ing is essential:1. If the engine has been running re‐

cently, turn off the engine and al‐low several minutes for the oil todrain back into the oil pan. Check‐ing the oil level too soon after en‐gine shutoff will not provide an ac‐curate oil level reading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way. Re‐move it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the MIN (minimum)mark, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommen‐ded oil and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section for an explanation of

9-8 Vehicle Care

what kind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications 3 11-2 .NoticeDo not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level getsabove the upper mark that showsthe proper operating range, the en‐gine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview(2.0L RHD) 3 9-4 EngineCompartment Overview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.Add enough oil to put the level some‐where in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen through.

Selecting the Right Engine OilSelecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade:Specification (Petrol Engines)Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos™ certification mark. Oils meet‐ing the requirements of the vehicleshould have the dexos certification

mark on the container. This certifica‐tion mark indicates that the oil hasbeen approved to the dexos specifi‐cation.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos1-approved engine oil.NoticeUse only engine oil that is approvedto the dexos specification or anequivalent engine oil of the appro‐priate viscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos specificationwill show the dexos symbol on thecontainer. Failure to use the recom‐mended engine oil or equivalent canresult in engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil is approvedto the dexos specification, ask yourservice provider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos1 is unavailable: If engine oil ofthe required quality is not available,you may use substitute engine oilmeeting dexos2, or engine oil display‐ing the API Starburst symbol, or anACEA C3 oil, all of the appropriateviscosity grade.Specification (Diesel Engines)Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos certification mark. Oils meetingthe requirements of the vehicleshould have the dexos certificationmark on the container. This certifica‐tion mark indicates that the oil hasbeen approved to the dexos specifi‐cation.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos2-approved engine oil.

Vehicle Care 9-9

NoticeUse only engine oil that is approvedto the dexos specification or anequivalent engine oil of the appro‐priate viscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos specificationwill show the dexos symbol on thecontainer. Failure to use the recom‐mended engine oil or equivalent canresult in engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil is approvedto the dexos specification, ask yourservice provider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos2 is unavailable: If engine oil ofthe required quality is not available,you may use substitute engine oil thatmeets ACEA C3 of the appropriateviscosity grade.Viscosity GradeSAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity gradefor the vehicle. Do not use other vis‐cosity oils such as SAE 10W-30,10W-40, or 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation: In an

area of extreme cold, where the tem‐perature falls below −29°C (−20°F),an SAE 0W-30 oil should be used. An

oil of this viscosity grade will provideeasier cold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures. Whenselecting an oil of the appropriate vis‐cosity grade, be sure to always selectan oil that meets the required specifi‐cation. See “Specification” earlier inthis section for more information.SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle.SAE 0W-30, 0W-40, or 5W-40 canalso be used. The numbers on an oilcontainer show its viscosity, or thick‐ness. Do not use other viscosity oilssuch as SAE 20W-50.The SAE viscosity rating defines theability of an oil to flow. When cold, oilis more viscous than when hot. Multi‐grade oil is indicated by two figures.The first figure, followed by a W, indi‐cates low temperature viscosity andthe second figure the high tempera‐ture viscosity.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. Theuse of engine oil additives couldcause engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

9-10 Vehicle Care

Engine oil system flushes are not rec‐ommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain ele‐ments that can be unhealthy for yourskin and could even cause cancer. Donot let used oil stay on your skin forvery long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good handcleaner. Wash or properly dispose ofclothing or rags containing used en‐gine oil. See the manufacturer's warn‐ings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.Used oil can be a threat to the envi‐ronment. If you change your own oil,be sure to drain all the oil from the fil‐ter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash or pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle itby taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change the en‐gine oil and filter. This is based ona combination of factors which in‐clude engine revolutions, engine tem‐perature, and miles driven. Based ondriving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life sys‐tem to work properly, the system mustbe reset every time the oil is changed.When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, it indi‐cates that an oil change is necessary.A change engine oil light displays.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It ispossible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightindicate that an oil change is not nec‐essary for up to a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and, at this time, the sys‐tem must be reset. Your dealer hastrained service people who will per‐form this work and reset the system.

It is also important to check the oilregularly over the course of an oildrain interval and keep it at the properlevel.If the system is ever reset acciden‐tally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemReset the system whenever the en‐gine oil is changed so that the systemcan calculate the next engine oilchange.To reset the system on gasoline en‐gine vehicles:1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN

with the engine off.2. Fully press and release the accel‐

erator pedal three times within fiveseconds.

If the change engine oil light does notappear, the system is reset.

Vehicle Care 9-11

To reset the system on diesel enginevehicles:1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN

with the engine off.2. Fully press the accelerator pedal

for two seconds or more.3. Fully release the accelerator

pedal for two seconds or more.4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 a total of

three times.If the change engine oil light does notappear, the system is reset.If the change engine oil light comesback on when the vehicle is started,the engine oil life system has not re‐set. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic Transmission FluidWhen to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission FluidA good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.Change the fluid and filter at the in‐tervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance 3 10-2 , and be sure

to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 .

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be a littledifficult, you may choose to have thisdone at the dealer service depart‐ment.If adding it yourself, be sure to followall the instructions here, or therecould be a false reading on the dip‐stick.NoticeToo much or too little fluid can dam‐age the transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engine partsor exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Too little fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if checkingthe transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before check‐ing the transmission fluid level if youhave been driving:■ When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).■ At high speed for quite a while.■ In heavy traffic — especially in hot

weather.■ While pulling a trailer.To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operating tem‐perature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).Get the vehicle warmed up by drivingabout 24 km (15 miles) when outsidetemperatures are above 10°C (50°F).If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drivethe vehicle in 3 (Third) until the enginetemperature gauge moves and thenremains steady for 10 minutes.A cold fluid check can be made afterthe vehicle has been sitting for eighthours or more with the engine off, butthis is used only as a reference. Letthe engine run at idle for five minutesif outside temperatures are 10°C(50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C

9-12 Vehicle Care

(50°F), the engine might have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, check the fluidhot before adding fluid. Checking thefluid hot gives a more accurate read‐ing of the fluid level.Checking the Fluid LevelTo prepare the vehicle:1. Park the vehicle on a level place.

Keep the engine running.2. With the parking brake applied,

place the shift lever in P (Park).3. With your foot on the brake pedal,

move the shift lever through eachgear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle for threeminutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine:1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3.

2. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

3. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it back outagain.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. The fluidlevel must be in the COLD area,for a cold check or in the HOT areafor a hot check. Be sure to keepthe dipstick pointed down to getan accurate reading.

5. If the fluid level is in the accepta‐ble range, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use.

Vehicle Care 9-13

Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid while it is hot.A cold check is used only as a refer‐ence. If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring thelevel up to the HOT area for a hotcheck. It does not take much fluid,generally less than one pint (0.5 L).Do not overfill.■ After adding fluid, recheck the fluid

level as described under “How toCheck Automatic TransmissionFluid,” earlier in this section.

■ When the correct fluid level is ob‐tained, push the dipstick back in allthe way; then flip the handle downto lock the dipstick in place.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview(2.0L RHD) 3 9-4EngineCompartment Overview (2.4LRHD )3 9-6 for the location of the en‐gine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervals andreplace it at the first oil change aftereach 83 000 km (50,000 mi) interval.See “Schedule Maintenance” in Serv‐ice and Maintenance for more infor‐mation. If driving in dusty/dirty condi‐tions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, re‐move the filter from the vehicle andlightly shake the filter to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remains cov‐ered with dirt, a new filter is required.Never use compressed air to cleanthe filter.To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:1. Open the hood. See Hood Hood

3 9-3 .

2. Locate the air filter housing in theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview (2.0LRHD) 3 9-4Engine CompartmentOverview (2.4L RHD )3 9-6

3. Loosen the clamp securing the aircleaner/filter cover to the duct as‐sembly.

4. Remove the screw securing thecover of the air cleaner/filter hous‐ing.

5. Pull straight up on cover, whileholding the cover remove the airfilter.

9-14 Vehicle Care

6. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts 3 10-6 for the correct fil‐ter part number.

7. Reverse steps 1 to 4 to installcover.

9 Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution when work‐ing on the engine and do not drivewith the air cleaner/filter off.

NoticeIf the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt caneasily get into the engine, whichcould damage it. Always have the aircleaner/filter in place when you aredriving.

Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4LL4 Engines)The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® engine cool‐ant. This coolant is designed to re‐main in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever oc‐curs first.The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there isa problem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 3 9-17 .

What to Use

9 Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong mix‐ture, the engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinka‐ble water and DEX-COOL coolant. Ifusing this mixture, nothing else needsto be added. This mixture:

Vehicle Care 9-15

■ Gives freezing protection down to−37°C (−34°F), outside tempera‐ture.

■ Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), engine tempera‐ture.

■ Protects against rust and corrosion.■ Will not damage aluminum parts.■ Helps keep the proper engine tem‐

perature.NoticeIf an improper coolant mixture isused, the engine could overheat andbe badly damaged. The repair costwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crack the en‐gine, radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

NoticeIf extra inhibitors and/or additivesare used in the vehicle's cooling sys‐tem, the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture of theengine coolant listed in this manualfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 for more infor‐mation.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, or into sewers, streams, orbodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legal require‐ments regarding used coolant dis‐posal. This will help protect the envi‐ronment and your health.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level sur‐face when checking the coolant level.Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant recovery tank. If the coolantinside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until itcools down. If coolant is visible but thecoolant level is not at or above the

mark pointed to, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant recoverytank, but be sure the cooling systemis cool before this is done.If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to the SurgeTank

9 Warning

You can be burned if you spill cool‐ant on hot engine parts. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant ona hot engine.

NoticeThis vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this pro‐cedure could cause the engine tooverheat and be severely damaged.

9-16 Vehicle Care

9 Warning

An electric engine cooling fan un‐der the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

9 Warning

Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They are un‐der pressure, and if you turn thesurge tank pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including thesurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andsurge tank pressure cap to cool ifyou ever have to turn the pressurecap.

You can remove the coolant surgetank pressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.1. Turn the pressure cap slowly

counterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressureleft.

2. Then keep turning the cap and re‐move it.

A. MAXB. MIN

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with theproper mixture to above the MIN(B) mark on the front of the coolantsurge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank capoff, start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose startsgetting hot. Watch out for the en‐gine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level in‐side the coolant surge tank maybe lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the levelreaches above the MIN (B) markon the front of the coolant surgetank.

5. Then replace the cap. Be sure thecap is hand-tight and fully seated.

NoticeIf the pressure cap is not tightly in‐stalled, coolant loss and possibleengine damage may occur. Be surethe cap is properly and tightly se‐cured.

Vehicle Care 9-17

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 .

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicators towarn of engine overheating.There is a coolant temperature gaugeand a warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster that indicate an over‐heated engine condition. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 3 5-14for more information.You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, but in‐stead get service help right away.If you do decide to lift the hood , makesure the vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.Then check to see if the engine cool‐ing fans are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan(s) should be run‐ning. If they are not, do not continueto run the engine and have the vehicleserviced.

NoticeEngine damage from running the en‐gine without coolant is not coveredby the warranty.

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment1. Turn the engine off.2. Move away from vehicle without

opening hood.3. Allow engine to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning is dis‐played but no steam can be seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:■ Climbing a long hill on a hot day.■ Stopping after high-speed driving.■ Idling for long periods in traffic.■ Towing a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:1. Turn the air conditioning off.2. Turn the heater on to the highest

temperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idlein N (Neutral) while stopped. If it issafe to do so, pull off the road, shiftto P (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longer displays,the vehicle can be driven. Continue todrive the vehicle slow for about 10 mi‐nutes. Keep a safe vehicle distancefrom the car in front of you. If thewarning does not come back on, con‐tinue to drive normally.If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

9-18 Vehicle Care

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is still dis‐played, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Power Steering FluidWhen to Check Power SteeringFluidPower steering fluid is used in all ve‐hicles.It is not necessary to regularly checkpower steering fluid unless you sus‐pect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluidloss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspec‐ted and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluidCheck the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least twenty mi‐nutes so the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid, dothe following:1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/

OFF and let the engine compart‐ment cool down.

2. Locate power steering reservoirunder the hood. Refer toEngineCompartment Overview (2.0LRHD)3 9-4 Engine CompartmentOverview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6.

3. Check that the fluid level is be‐tween the MIN and MAX lines onthe power steering reservoir.

4. If fluid is needed, turn the capcounterclockwise and pull itstraight up.

5. Fill power steering fluid reservoirto between the MAX and MINlines.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the reservoir.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use,see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 . Always use theproper fluid.

Vehicle Care 9-19

Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read the manufactur‐er's instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tank isfull. See Engine Compartment

Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4 EngineCompartment Overview (2.4LRHD)3 9-6 for reservoir location.Notice■ When using concentrated washer

fluid, follow the manufacturer's in‐structions for adding water.

■ Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can causethe solution to freeze and damagethe washer fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system. Also,water does not clean as well aswasher fluid.

■ Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is verycold. This allows for fluid expan‐sion if freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank if it is com‐pletely full.

■ Do not use engine coolant (anti‐freeze) in the windshield washer.It can damage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wear indica‐tors that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are wornand new pads are needed. The soundcan come and go or be heard all thetime the vehicle is moving, exceptwhen applying the brake pedal firmly.

9 Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

NoticeContinuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightly ap‐plied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

9-20 Vehicle Care

Properly torqued wheel nuts are nec‐essary to help prevent brake pulsa‐tion. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenlytighten wheel nuts in the proper se‐quence to torque specifications inCapacities and Specifications3 11-2 .Brake linings should always be re‐placed as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving, thebrakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to be oftop quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the braking sys‐tem are replaced, be sure to get new,approved replacement parts. If this isnot done, the brakes might not workproperly. For example, installing discbrake pads that are wrong for the ve‐hicle, can change the balance be‐tween the front and rear brakes — forthe worse. The braking performanceexpected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacement brakeparts are installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT 4 brake fluid.There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:■ The brake fluid level goes down be‐

cause of normal brake lining wear.When new linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

■ A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluidlevel. Have the brake hydraulic sys‐tem fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add or re‐move brake fluid, as necessary, onlywhen work is done on the brake hy‐draulic system.

Vehicle Care 9-21

9 Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn, ifthe engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 3 5-19 .What to AddUse only new DOT 4 brake fluid froma sealed container. It is recommen‐ded that the brake hydraulic systembe flushed and refilled with new DOT4 fluid at a regular maintenance serv‐ice every two years. See ScheduledMaintenance 3 10-2 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 .Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the cap be‐fore removing it. This helps keep dirtfrom entering the reservoir.

9 Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice■ Using the wrong fluid can badly

damage brake hydraulic systemparts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake hy‐draulic system can damage brakehydraulic system parts so badlythat they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

■ If brake fluid is spilled on the vehi‐cle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Be carefulnot to spill brake fluid on the vehi‐cle. If you do, wash it off immedi‐ately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview (2.0LRHD)3 9-4 Engine CompartmentOverview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6 for batterylocation.

Vehicle Storage

9 Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting3 9-63 for tips on workingaround a battery without gettinghurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery tokeep the battery from running down.Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from the bat‐tery or use a battery trickle charger.

9-22 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel DriveWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly checkthe transfer case fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and re‐paired.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly checkrear axle fluid unless you suspectthere is a leak or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and re‐paired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehi‐cle should be on a level surface.If the level is below the bottom of thefiller plug hole, you will need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of thefiller plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule todetermine what kind of lubricant touse. See Scheduled Maintenance3 10-2 .

Starter Switch Check

9 Warning

When you are doing this inspec‐tion, the vehicle could move sud‐denly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be surethere is enough room around thevehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake. SeeParking Brake 3 8-26 .Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be ready to turn off the engineimmediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmission vehi‐cles, try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should start onlyin P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the ve‐hicle starts in any other position,contact your dealer for service.For manual transmission vehi‐cles, put the shift lever in Neutral,push the clutch pedal down half‐way, and try to start the engine.

Vehicle Care 9-23

The vehicle should start onlywhen the clutch pedal is pusheddown all the way to the floor. If thevehicle starts when the clutchpedal is not pushed all the waydown, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check

9 Warning

When you are doing this inspec‐tion, the vehicle could move sud‐denly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be surethere is enough room around thevehicle. It should be parked ona level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake 3 8-26.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the igni‐tion on, but do not start the engine.Without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift leverout of P (Park) with normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer forservice.

Ignition Transmission LockCheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift lever posi‐tion.■ The ignition should turn to LOCK/

OFF only when the shift lever is inP (Park).

■ The ignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service is re‐quired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

9 Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle begin tomove.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the ve‐hicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set the park‐ing brake.■ To check the parking brake's hold‐

ing ability: With the engine runningand the transmission in N (Neutral),slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this un‐til the vehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

9-24 Vehicle Care

■ To check the P (Park) mechanism'sholding ability: With the engine run‐ning, shift to P (Park). Then releasethe parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service is re‐quired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be in‐spected for wear and cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance 3 10-2for more information.Replacement blades come in differ‐ent types and are removed in differentways. For proper type and length, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts3 10-6 .To replace the windshield wiperblade:1. Pull the windshield wiper assem‐

bly away from the windshield.

2. Lift up on plastic latch in the mid‐dle of the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull the wiperblade down toward the windshieldfar enough to release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any dam‐age that occurs would not be cov‐ered by the vehicle warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade to touchthe windshield.

5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Vehicle Care 9-25

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.If the vehicle is damaged in an acci‐dent, the aim of the headlamps maybe affected and adjustment may benecessary.It is recommended that a dealer ad‐just the headlamps. To re-aim theheadlamps yourself, use the followingprocedure.The vehicle should be properly pre‐pared as follows:■ The vehicle should be placed so the

headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) froma light colored wall.

■ The vehicle must have all four tireson a level surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

■ The vehicle should be placed so itis perpendicular to the wall or otherflat surface.

■ The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

■ The vehicle should be fully assem‐bled and all other work stoppedwhile headlamp aiming is beingperformed.

■ The vehicle should be normally loa‐ded with a full tank of fuel and oneperson or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting onthe driver's seat.

■ Tires should be properly inflated.Headlamp aiming is done with the ve‐hicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will be cor‐rectly aimed if the low-beam head‐lamps are aimed properly.To adjust the vertical aim, do the fol‐lowing:1. Open the hood. See Hood Hood

3 9-3 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the dis‐tance.

9-26 Vehicle Care

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to the recordeddistance from Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of the vehicleat the height of the mark in Step 4.

NoticeDo not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Coveringa headlamp may cause excessiveheat build-up which may cause dam‐age to the headlamp.6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps

and place a piece of cardboard orequivalent in front of the head‐lamp not being adjusted. This al‐lows only the beam of light fromthe headlamp being adjusted tobe seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aim‐ing screws, which are under thehood near each headlamp as‐sembly.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw un‐til the headlamp beam is aimed tothe horizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle of thebeam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at the bot‐tom edge of the horizontal tapeline. The lamp on the left (A)shows the correct headlamp aim.The lamp on the right (B) showsthe incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for theopposite headlamp.

Vehicle Care 9-27

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs3 9-31 .For any bulb changing procedure notlisted in this section, contact yourdealer.

Halogen Bulbs

9 Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the instructions onthe bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

9 Warning

The low beam high intensity dis‐charge lighting system operates ata very high voltage. If you try toservice any of the system compo‐nents, you could be seriously in‐jured. Have your dealer or a quali‐fied technician service them.

The vehicle may have HID head‐lamps. After an HID headlamp bulbhas been replaced, you may noticethat the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This isnormal.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps

A. Turn Signal LampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. High-Beam HeadlampD. Parking Lamp

High Intensity Discharge (HID)HeadlampsIf the vehicle is equipped with HIDlighting, see your dealer for headlampreplacement. See High IntensityDischarge (HID) Lighting 3 9-27 formore information.

9-28 Vehicle Care

Halogen HeadlampsTo replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the hood. See Hood

3 9-3 .

2. Remove the three screws (A) re‐taining the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the headlamp assemblystraight forward releasing the re‐taining studs from the grommets.

4. Remove the dust cover from theback of the headlamp housing byturning counterclockwise a quar‐ter turn.

5. Disconnect the electrical connec‐tor.

6. Remove the bulb from the head‐lamp assembly by releasing thespring clamp.

7. Install the new bulb in the socket.8. Install the bulb and attach the

spring clamp. Reconnect the elec‐trical connector

9. Install the dust cover in the backof the headlamp housing by turn‐ing clockwise a quarter turn.

10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.

Parking LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3.2. Remove the headlamp assembly.3. Remove the dust cover from the

back of the headlamp housing byturning counterclockwise a quar‐ter turn.

4. Turn the bulb socket (C) counter‐clockwise to remove it from theheadlamp assembly (A).

Vehicle Care 9-29

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of thesocket (C).

6. Push the new bulb into the socket(C) and reinstall the socket intothe headlamp assembly (A) byturning it clockwise.

Front Turn Signal LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3.2. Remove the headlamp assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socket (C) counter‐clockwise to remove it from theheadlamp assembly (A).

4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of thesocket (C).

5. Push the new bulb into the socket(C) and reinstall the socket intothe headlamp assembly (A) byturning it clockwise.

Fog LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3 .

2. Remove the three screws (A) re‐taining the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the headlamp assemblystraight forward releasing the re‐taining studs from the grommets.

4. Remove the connector retainingtab (A).

5. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb (C) bypressing the connector release(B) and pulling straight back.

6. Remove the old bulb from thefrom the fog lamp assembly bysqueezing the bulb release tabsand pulling straight out.

7. Push the new bulb into the bulbassembly until it locks into place.

9-30 Vehicle Care

8. Install the wiring harness connec‐tor to the bulb. Be sure the con‐nector release (B) locks intoplace.

9. Install the connector retaining tab(A).

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLampsTo replace one of these lamps:1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate

3 2-6 .

2. Remove the two screws retainingthe taillamp assembly in place.

3. Pull the lamp assembly straightrearward releasing the retainingstuds from the grommets.

4. Turn the bulb socket counter‐clockwise to remove it.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise toremove it from the bulb socket.

6. Install the new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise toreinstall.

8. Install the lamp assembly into thevehicle. Make sure to align the re‐taining studs to the grommets.

9. Install two screws to secure lampassembly in place on the vehicle.

License Plate LampThe licence plate lamps for this vehi‐cle are on the trunk lid.To replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate

3 2-6 .

2. Remove two screws and the lampcover.

3. Turn the bulb socket counter‐clockwise to remove from lampassembly .

4. Pull the bulb straight out of thebulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall into lamp assembly.

6. Install the bulb socket back intothe lamp housing.

7. Install the lamp cover using twoscrews.

Vehicle Care 9-31

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamp W16W

Front Turn SignalLamp PY21W

Front Parking Lamp W21/5W

Headlamp (Base)High Beam H7

Headlamp(Base) LowBeam H7

License Plate Lamp W5W

Rear Fog Lamp P21W

Rear Stop/Tail Lamp W21/5W

Rear Turn SignalLamp W21W

Side IdentificationMarker Lamp (IfEquipped)

W5W

For replacement bulbs not listed here,contact your dealer.

Electrical SystemElectrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against an electri‐cal system overload.When the current electrical load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until thecurrent load returns to normal or theproblem is fixed. This greatly reducesthe chance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.Replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, the sameamperage fuse can be borrowed.Choose some feature of the vehiclethat is not needed to use and replaceit as soon as possible.

Headlamp WiringAn electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in some ca‐ses to remain off. Have the headlampwiring checked right away if the lampsgo on and off or remain off.

Windshield WipersIf the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windshield be‐fore using the windshield wipers.If the overload is caused by an elec‐trical problem and not snow or ice, besure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits bya combination of fuses and circuit

9-32 Vehicle Care

breakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused by electri‐cal problems.To check a fuse, look at the silver-col‐ored band inside the fuse. If the bandis broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure to replace a bad fuse witha new one of the identical size andrating.Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out. Re‐place the fuse as soon as possible.To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block 3 9-32and Instrument Panel Fuse Block3 9-35 .

Engine Compartment FuseBlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the right side of the en‐gine compartment, near the battery.

NoticeSpilling liquid on any electrical com‐ponent on the vehicle may damageit. Always keep the covers on anyelectrical component.

Vehicle Care 9-33

9-34 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem

A/CHeater, Ventilation,and AirConditioningSystem

BATT1Instrument PanelFuse Block MainFeed 1



BCM Body ControlModule

ECM Engine ControlModule

Fuses Usage

ECM PWRTRN

Engine ControlModule/Powertrain

ENG SNSR MiscellaneousEngine Sensors

EPB Electric ParkingBrake

FAN1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN3 Cooling Fan 3

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps

FRT WPR Front Wiper Motor

FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/VacuumPump

HDLPWASHER Headlamp Washer

HI BEAM LH High-BeamHeadlamp (Left)

HI BEAM RH High-BeamHeadlamp (Right)

HORN Horn

Fuses Usage

HTD WASH/MIR

Heated WasherFluid/HeatedMirrors

IGN COIL A Ignition Coil A

IGN COIL B Ignition Coil B

LO BEAM LH Low-BeamHeadlamp (Left)

LO BEAM RH Low-BeamHeadlamp (Right)

PRK LP LH Parking Lamps(Left)

PRK LP RH Parking Lamps(Right)

PRK LP RH*Parking Lamps(Right) (EuropePark Lamps)

PWM FAN Pulse WidthModulation Fan

REAR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

Vehicle Care 9-35

Fuses Usage

REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor

SPARE Not Used

STOP LAMP Stop Lamps

STRTR Starter

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRLR PRK LP Trailer ParkingLamps

Relays Usage

FAN1 RLY Cooling Fan 1



FRT FOG RLY Front Fog Lamps

FUEL/VACPUMP RLY

Fuel Pump/Vacuum PumpRelay

HDLP WSHRRLY Headlamp Washer

Relays Usage

HI BEAM RLY High BeamHeadlamps

LO BEAM RLY Low BeamHeadlamps

PWR/TRN RLY Powertrain

REAR DEFOGRLY

Rear WindowDefogger

STOP LAMPRLY Stop Lamps

STRTR RLY Starter

WPR CNTRLRLY Wiper Control

WPR SPD RLY Wiper Speed

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is lo‐cated on the passenger side of thelower console.

Pull the latch of the fuse box coverstraight back to access the fuses.

9-36 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care 9-37

The vehicle may not have all of thefuses, relays, and features shown.

Fuses Usage

AMP Amplifier

APO JACK(CONSOLE)

Auxiliary PowerOutlet Jack

APO JACK(REAR

CARGO)

Auxiliary PowerOutlet Jack RearCargo

AWD/VENT All-Wheel Drive/Ventilation

BCM (CTSY) Body ControlModule (Courtesy)

BCM(DIMMER)

Body ControlModule (Dimmer)

BCM (INTLIGHT) TRLR

FOG

Body ControlModule (InteriorLight), Trailer FogLamps

BCM (PRK/TRN)

Body ControlModule (Parking/Turn Signal)

Fuses Usage

BCM (STOP)Body ControlModule (StopLamp)

BCM (TRNSIG)

Body ControlModule (TurnSignal)

BCM (VBATT)Body ControlModule (BatteryVoltage)

CIGAR Cigarette

CIM CommunicationsIntegration Module

CLSTR Instrument Cluster

DRL Daytime RunningLamps

DR/LCK Driver Door Lock

DRVR PWRSEAT Driver Power Seat

DRV/PWRWNDW

Driver PowerWindow

Fuses Usage

F/DOOR LOCK Fuel Door Lock

FRT WSR Front Washer

FSCM Fuel SystemControl Module

FSCM/VENTSOL

Fuel SystemControl Module,Vent Solenoid

HEATING MATSW Heating Mat Switch

HTD SEATPWR Heated Seat Power

HVAC BLWRHeating,Ventilation, and AirConditioningBlower

IPC Instrument PanelCluster

ISRVM/RCMInside RearviewMirror/RemoteCompass Module

9-38 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

KEYCAPTURE Key Capture

L/GATE Lift Gate

LOGISTICMODE Logistic Mode

OSRVM Outside Rear ViewMirror

PASS PWRWNDW

Passenger PowerWindow

PWR DIODE Power Diode

PWR MODING Power Moding

RADIO Radio

RR FOG Rear Defogger

RUN 2 Power Battery KeyOn Run

RUN/CRNK Run Crank

SDM (BATT) Safety DiagnosisModule (Battery)

Fuses Usage

SDM (IGN 1) Safety DiagnosisModule (Ignition 1)

SPARE Spare

S/ROOF Sunroof

S/ROOF BATT Sunroof Battery

SSPS Speed SensitivePower Steering

STR/WHL SW Steering WheelSwitch

TRLR Trailer

TRLR BATT Trailer Battery

XBCM Export BodyControl Module

XM/HVAC/DLC

XM™ SatelliteRadio (IfEquipped)/Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioning/DataLink Connection

Relays Usage

ACC/RAP RLY Accessory/RunAccessory Power

CIGAR APOJACK RLY

Cigarette andAuxiliary PowerOutlet

RUN/CRNKRLY Run/Crank

RUN RLY Run

Vehicle Care 9-39

Wheels and TiresTiresFactory-fitted tires are matched to thisvehicle, offering the most effectivecombination of ride comfort, tread lifeand performance.

9 Warning

■ Poorly maintained and improp‐erly used tires are dangerous.

■ Overloading the tires can causeoverheating as a result of toomuch flexing. There could bea blowout and a serious crash.See Vehicle Load Limits3 8-10 .

■ Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crash couldcause serious injury. Check alltires frequently to maintain therecommended pressure. Tirepressure should be checkedwhen the tires are cold.

■ Overinflated tires are more likelyto be cut, punctured, or brokenby a sudden impact — such aswhen hitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommended pres‐sure.

■ Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

■ Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impacts withpotholes, curbs, etc.

■ Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only the dealeror an authorized tire servicecenter should repair, replace,dismount, and mount the tires.

■ Do not spin the tires in excess of55 km/h (35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow, mud,ice, etc. Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Driving over sharp objects can dam‐age the tires and wheels. If some ob‐jects are unavoidable, drive overthem slowly and at a right angle, ifpossible.When parking, avoid making contactwith the curb.

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tires on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice covered roads is expected. All

9-40 Vehicle Care

season tires provide good overall per‐formance on most surfaces but theymay not offer the traction you wouldlike or the same level of performanceas winter tires on snow or ice coveredroads.Winter tires, in general, are designedfor increased traction on snow and icecovered roads. With winter tires, theremay be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tire availability and proper tireselection. Using incorrect winter tiresmay adversely affect Stability SystemPerformance. Also, see Buying NewTires 3 9-46 .If using snow tires:■ Use them on all four wheels.■ Never exceed the maximum speed

specified by the tire manufacturer.■ Always use the tire pressure speci‐

fied by the tire manufacturer.

Winter tires with the same speed rat‐ing as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire's max‐imum speed capability.

Tire PressureNoticeNeither tire underinflation nor over‐inflation is good. Underinflated tires,or tires that do not have enough air,can result in:■ Tire overloading and overheating

which could lead to a blowout.■ Premature or irregular wear.■ Poor handling.■ Reduced fuel economy.Overinflated tires, or tires that havetoo much air, can result in:■ Unusual wear.■ Poor handling.■ Rough ride.■ Needless damage from road haz‐

ards.

Maintaining tires at the pressurespecified in this manual will ensurethe most effective combination of driv‐ing comfort, safety and performance.Incorrect tire inflation pressure will:■ Increase tire wear.■ Impair vehicle handling and safe

operation.■ Affect ride comfort.■ Reduce fuel economy.If the tire pressures are too low, tirescan overheat and suffer internal dam‐age, tread separation, and evena blowout at high speeds. Even if youlater adjust the inflation pressure ofthe tires, previous driving with lowpressure may have damaged thetires.

When to CheckThe tire pressure should be checkedeach time you fill the fuel tank or atleast once a month using a tire pres‐sure gauge.

Vehicle Care 9-41

Check the inflation pressure when thetires are cold. Warm tires will producean inaccurate reading. Tires can be‐come warm after driving more than1.6 km (1 mile) and stay warm for upto three hours after stopping.

How to CheckUse an accurate tire pressure gaugeto check the pressure of the tireswhen they are cold. Securely re‐tighten the valve caps after checkingthe tire inflation pressure.

9-42 Vehicle Care

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Tire Size

Recommended Cold Tire InflationFront Rear

Less than fouroccupants

More than fiveoccupants with towing

a trailerLess than four

occupants

More than fiveoccupants with towing

a trailer

215/70R16 30 psi (210 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 35 psi (240 kPa)



155/90R16(Temporary) 60 psi 60 psi 60 psi 60 psi

Vehicle Care 9-43

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemNoticeModifications made to the Tire Pres‐sure Monitor System (TPMS) byanyone other than an authorizedservice facility may void authoriza‐tion to use the system.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensor tech‐nology to check tire pressure levels.The TPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in your vehicle's tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.Each tire, including the spare (if pro‐vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi‐cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac‐ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the ve‐hicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve‐hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres‐sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a signifi‐cantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is nota substitute for proper tire mainte‐nance, and it is the driver's responsi‐bility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina‐tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper‐

ating properly. The TPMS malfunc‐tion indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the sys‐tem detects a malfunction, the telltalewill flash for approximately one mi‐nute and then remain continuously il‐luminated. This sequence will con‐tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator is illu‐minated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, includ‐ing the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehi‐cle that prevent the TPMS from func‐tioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after re‐placing one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle to ensure that the re‐placement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation3 9-44 for additional information.

9-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tire Pres‐sure Monitor System (TPMS). TheTPMS continually checks the pres‐sure and speed of all four tires whiledriving. TPMS sensors are mountedonto each tire and wheel assembly,excluding the spare tire and wheel as‐sembly.The TPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the vehicle's tires andtransmit the tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.Once a minute, the pressure of eachtire is sent to a control unit for com‐parison. If the system detects one ormore pressure differences, a mes‐sage appears on the information dis‐play. The current tire pressure can beshown in the information display if thevehicle has a graphical informationdisplay or color information displayand trip computer.All tires must have pressure sensorsand be filled to the prescribed pres‐sure for the system to operate prop‐erly.

Once the ignition is on, the TPMS sys‐tem is operational and will continu‐ously monitor the tire pressure atspeeds of approximately 40 km/h andabove.The TPMS automatically detects if thevehicle is being driven with a load ofup to three persons or a full load.The TPMS does not replace manualchecks with a tire gauge. Check thetire pressure at least every 14 daysand prior to any long trip. The tires,including the spare, should bechecked when cold.To display the current tire pressureselect Tires from the board computermenu.A warning message is shown on theinformation display if one or more ofthe tires has pressure differences. Insome versions the message will dis‐play in abbreviated form. SeeWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators 3 5-10 for additional infor‐mation.

NoticeTire sealant materials are not all thesame. A non-approved tire sealantcould damage the TPMS sensors.TPMS sensor damage caused byusing an incorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty. Al‐ways use only the GM-approved tiresealant available through yourdealer or included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits usea GM approved liquid tire sealant. Us‐ing non-approved tire sealants coulddamage the TPMS sensors. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit3 9-50 for information regarding theinflator kit materials and instructions.

Tire InspectionRegularly inspect the vehicle's tires,including the spare tire, if the vehiclehas one, for signs of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for New Tires3 9-45 for more information.

Vehicle Care 9-45

Always remove the tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:■ You can see the indicators at three

or more places around the tire.■ You can see cord or fabric showing

through the tire's rubber.■ The tread or sidewall is cracked,

cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

■ The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.■ The tire has a puncture, cut, or

other damage that cannot be re‐paired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

Check the wheels for damage.Tire defects including those abovecan cause loss of control of the vehi‐cle, resulting in a possible collision.If the tires or wheels are damaged orshow abnormal wear see your dealer.

Tire Rotation (Long WheelBase)Normally, the front tires wear fasterthan the rear tires.

To prolong the life of the tires andavoid uneven treadwear:

1. Rotate the tires using the rotationpattern shown if the front tiresshow greater wear than the reartires.

2. Maintain the correct tire pressure.3. Check tightening of the lug nuts/

bolts. See Tire Changing3 9-56 .

Lightly coat the center of the wheelhub with wheel bearing grease aftera wheel change or tire rotation to pre‐vent corrosion or rust build-up. Do notget grease on the flat wheel mountingsurface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for New TiresFactors such as maintenance, tem‐peratures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affectthe wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires. Tread‐wear indicators appear when the tireshave only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less oftread remaining. See Tire Inspection3 9-44 and Tire Rotation (Long WheelBase) 3 9-45 for more information.The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire, ifthe vehicle has one, even if it is never

9-46 Vehicle Care

used. Multiple conditions includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenanceaffect how fast aging takes place.Tires will typically need to be replaceddue to wear before they may need tobe replaced due to age. Consult thetire manufacturer for more informa‐tion on when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle StorageTires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slow ag‐ing. This area should be free ofgrease, gasoline, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at leasta month, remove the tires or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetires.

Buying New TiresThis vehicle was delivered with radialtires. We recommend using radials ofthe same size, design, tread wear,temperature and speed rating whenreplacing them.

9 Warning

Tires could explode during im‐proper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

9 Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resulting ina crash or other vehicle damage.Use the correct size, brand, andtype of tires on all wheels.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics, sta‐bility, and resistance to rollover maybe affected. If the vehicle has elec‐tronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction con‐trol, and electronic stability control,the performance of these systemscan also be affected.

Vehicle Care 9-47

9 Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increa‐ses the chance of a crash and se‐rious injury. Only use GM specificwheel and tire systems developedfor the vehicle, and have themproperly installed by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires 3 9-46 andAccessories and Modifications 3 9-2for additional information.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory to providethe longest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing will notbe necessary on a regular basis.However, check the alignment if thereis unusual tire wear or if the vehicle ispulling to one side or the other. If thevehicle vibrates when driving ona smooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminumwheels can be repaired. See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity, diame‐ter, width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.

9 Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of the ve‐hicle. Tires can lose air, and causeloss of control, causing a crash.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for re‐placement.

9-48 Vehicle Care

NoticeThe wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48 formore information.

Used Replacement Wheels

9 Warning

Replacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has beenused or how far it has been drivenmay be unknown. It could fail sud‐denly and cause a crash. Whenreplacing wheels, use a new GMoriginal equipment wheel.

Tire ChainsRemove any wheel coverings, if thevehicle has them, before fitting chainsto the vehicle to avoid scratchingthem.

■ Follow the chain manufacturer's in‐structions.

■ Only use tire chains on 215/70R16size front tires. Do not use chainson the other tire sizes. Apply wintertires on vehicles with 235/55R18size tires.

■ Re-tighten the chains after drivingabout 1 km (.5 miles).

■ SAE class S-type chains are propertype for this vehicle.

■ Always drive slowly when you areusing tire chains.

■ If you hear the chains contactingthe vehicle, stop and re-tighten thechains.

■ If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow out, es‐pecially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires 3 9-39 . If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there is evera blowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off the ac‐celerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake toa stop, well off the road, if possible.A rear blowout, particularly ona curve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing the ac‐celerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may be verybumpy and noisy. Gently brake toa stop, well off the road, if possible.

Vehicle Care 9-49

9 Warning

Driving on a flat tire will cause per‐manent damage to the tire. Re-in‐flating a tire after it has been drivenon while severely underinflated orflat may cause a blowout and a se‐rious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been drivenon while severely underinflated orflat. Have your dealer or an au‐thorized tire service center repairor replace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

9 Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. Ifa jack is provided with the vehicle,it is designed only for changinga flat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire andwheel damage by driving slowly toa level place, well off the road, if pos‐sible. Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 3 6-3 .

9 Warning

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall causing injuryor death. Find a level place tochange the tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put an automatic transmission

in P (Park) or a manual trans‐mission in 1 (First) or R (Re‐verse).

3. Turn off the engine and do notrestart while the vehicle israised.

4. Do not allow passengers to re‐main in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tire

9-50 Vehicle Care

safely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing 3 9-56 . Touse the tire sealant and compressorkit, see Tire Sealant and CompressorKit 3 9-50 .When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as a guideto assist you in the placement ofwheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant and CompressorKit

9 Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation is dan‐gerous. Engine exhaust may enterthe vehicle. Engine exhaust con‐tains carbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath. Never run the engine in anenclosed area that has no fresh airventilation. For more information,see Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 .

9 Warning

Overinflating a tire could cause thetire to rupture and you or otherscould be injured. Be sure to readand follow the tire sealant andcompressor kit instructions and in‐flate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed the rec‐ommended pressure.

9 Warning

Storing the tire sealant and com‐pressor kit or other equipment inthe passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant and com‐pressor kit in its original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not bea spare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.The tire sealant and compressor canbe used to temporarily seal puncturesup to 6 mm (¼ in) in the tread area ofthe tire. It can also be used to inflatean under inflated tire.If the tire has been separated from thewheel, has damaged sidewalls, orhas a large puncture, the tire is tooseverely damaged for the tire sealantand compressor kit to be effective.Read and follow all of the tire sealantand compressor kit instructions.

Vehicle Care 9-51

The kit includes:

A. Pressure GaugeB. Pressure Deflation Button (White)

C. Selector SwitchD. On/Off Button (Orange)E. Tire Sealant CanisterF. Air Only Hose (Black Hose/White

Tip)G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear Hose/Or‐

ange Tip)H. Power Plug

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handling in‐structions on the label adhered to thesealant canister.Check the tire sealant expiration dateon the sealant canister. The sealantcanister should be replaced before itsexpiration date. Replacement sealantcanisters are available at your localdealer. See “Removal and Installationof the Sealant Canister” following.There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealant can‐ister and sealant/air hose assemblymust be replaced. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister”following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate a Punctured Tire

9-52 Vehicle Care

When using the tire sealant and com‐pressor kit during cold temperatures,warm the kit in a heated environmentfor five minutes. This will help to in‐flate the tire faster.If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire andwheel damage by driving slowly toa level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 3 6-3 .See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48 forother important safety warnings.Do not remove any objects that havepenetrated the tire.1. Remove the tire sealant and com‐

pressor kit from its storage loca‐tion. See Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit 3 9-56 .

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the ground sothe hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning it counter‐clockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in the ve‐hicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. SeePower Outlets 3 5-9 .If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use the ciga‐rette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cordin the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (C) coun‐terclockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off (D) button to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit on.The compressor will inject sealantand air into the tire.The pressure gauge (A) will ini‐tially show a high pressure whilethe compressor pushes the seal‐ant into the tire. Once the sealantis completely dispersed into thetire, the pressure will quickly dropand start to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to the recommen‐ded inflation pressure using thepressure gauge (A). The recom‐mended inflation pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading In‐formation label. See TirePressure 3 9-40 .The pressure gauge (A) may readhigher than the actual tire pres‐sure while the compressor is on.Turn the compressor off to get anaccurate pressure reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off

Vehicle Care 9-53

until the correct pressure isreached.

NoticeIf the recommended pressure can‐not be reached after approximately25 minutes, the vehicle should notbe driven farther. The tire is too se‐verely damaged and the tire sealantand compressor kit cannot inflatethe tire. Remove the power plugfrom the accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose from thetire valve.

11. Press the on/off button (D) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit off.The tire is not sealed and will con‐tinue to leak air until the vehicle isdriven and the sealant is distrib‐uted in the tire, therefore, Steps12 through 18 must be done im‐mediately after Step 11.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.15. Replace the sealant/air hose (G),

and the power plug (H) back intheir original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflate tothe recommended inflation pres‐sure, remove the maximum speedlabel from the sealant canister (E)and place it in a highly visible lo‐cation.Do not exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire is re‐paired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to its origi‐nal storage location in the vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 miles) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location and checkthe tire pressure. Refer to Steps1 through 11 under “Using the TireSealant and Compressor Kit with‐out Sealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”If the tire pressure has fallen morethan 68 kPa (10 psi) below the rec‐ommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire istoo severely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.If the tire pressure has not drop‐ped more than 68 kPa (10 psi)from the recommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to the rec‐ommended inflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealant can‐ister (E) and sealant/air hose (G)assembly at a local dealer or inaccordance with local regulationsand practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

9-54 Vehicle Care

23. After temporarily sealing a tire us‐ing the tire sealant and compres‐sor kit, take the vehicle to an au‐thorized dealer within a 161 km(100 miles) of driving to have thetire repaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured)To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire andwheel damage by driving slowly toa level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 3 6-3 .See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48for otherimportant safety warnings.1. Remove the tire sealant and com‐

pressor kit from its storage loca‐tion. See Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit 3 9-56

2. Unwrap the air only hose (F) andthe power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the ground sothe hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (F) ontothe tire valve stem and turn itclockwise until tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in the ve‐hicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. SeePower Outlets 3 5-9 .If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use the ciga‐rette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cordin the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

Vehicle Care 9-55

8. Turn the selector switch (C) clock‐wise to the Air Only position.

9. Press the on/off (D) button to turnthe compressor on.The compressor will inflate the tirewith air only.

10. Inflate the tire to the recommen‐ded inflation pressure using thepressure gauge (A). The recom‐mended inflation pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading In‐formation label. See TirePressure 3 9-40 .The pressure gauge (A) may readhigher than the actual tire pres‐sure while the compressor is on.

Turn the compressor off to get anaccurate reading. The compres‐sor may be turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.If you inflate the tire higher thanthe recommended pressure youcan adjust the excess pressure bypressing the pressure deflationbutton (D) until the proper pres‐sure reading is reached. This op‐tion is only functional when usingthe air only hose (F).

11. Press the on/off button (D) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit off.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose (F)from the tire valve stem, by turningit counterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (F) andthe power plug (H) back in its orig‐inal location.

15. Place the equipment in the origi‐nal storage location in the vehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflate airmattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister:1. Unwrap both hoses.

9-56 Vehicle Care

2. Slide the canister away from thecompressor housing.

3. Unscrew the hose connected tothe canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Attach the hose to the canisterand tighten.

6. Slide the new canister into place.Make sure it sits in the compres‐sor housing socket.

7. Replace both hoses to their origi‐nal location.

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor KitTo access the tire sealant and com‐pressor kit:1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate

3 2-6 .2. Lift the cover.

7–Passenger Vehicle3. Remove the tire sealant and com‐

pressor kit.To store the tire sealant and compres‐sor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire ChangingRemoving the Spare Tire andTools

Vehicle Care 9-57

In some models, jack handle type isapplied to the vehicle.

9 Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passenger com‐partment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

The jack and tools are located in theluggage compartment below the rearbumper.To remove the jack and tools:1. Open the liftgate.2. Lift the floor cover to the locate the

wing bolt.

3. Turn the wing bolt counterclock‐wise to remove it from the jack.

4. Remove the jack and tool bag.5. Remove the straps holding the

tool bag.6. Remove the tools from the bag.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to re‐move the hole cover above therear bumper.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenthe bolt to lower the spare tire.

3. Unhook the cable on the tire car‐rier located below the rearbumper.

4. Remove the spare tire. SeeCompact Spare Tire 3 9-63 .

Stow the jack and tools securely sothey do not rattle while the car is mov‐ing.

9-58 Vehicle Care

How to use Jack for change thetire after installation Side Skirt LH/RHTake off CAP in the location you wantto change the tire as shown.

Instruction : Take off the CAP1. Use screw driver push on Rivet

1 time for unlocked and then takeoff Rivet 2 pcs. as shown.

2. Pull CAP out in the direction asshown. After take off CAP, thenplace the jack under the jackingpoint for change the tire.

After take off CAP, then place the jackunder the jacking point for change thetire.Install the CAP after removed the jackfrom jacking pointInstruction : Installation1. Push CAP into locked position as

shown.2. Install Rivet 2 pcs. to CAP and

then use screw driver push onRivet 1 time for locked CAP withSide skirt LH/RH as shown.

Vehicle Care 9-59

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before pro‐

ceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat3 9-48.Call a garage or motoring servicefor assistance if it is not safe tojack the vehicle or change the tiresafely.

2. Use the wheel wrench or screw‐driver to remove the wheel coverif there is one.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Do not removeany of the nuts until the wheel isoff the ground.

4. Attach the wheel wrench to thejack bolt head and rotate thewheel wrench clockwise to lift thehead a little.

5. There are notches under thedoors at the front and rear of thevehicle.Position the jack vertically at thefront or rear jacking notch closestto the wheel being changed. Makesure all of the jack lift head istouching the jacking flange under

the body. Do not place the jackunder a body panel. The lowerbody panel has an arrow to aid inlocating the jacking location.

6. Put the compact spare tire nearyou.

9 Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can dam‐age the vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, besure to fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

9-60 Vehicle Care

7. Turn the wheel wrench or jackhandle clockwise until the liftinghead fits firmly into the appropri‐ate notch and the tire is off theground about 2.5 cm (1 in).Do not raise the vehicle more thanis necessary to change the tire.

9 Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If the ve‐hicle slips off the jack you could bebadly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is suppor‐ted only by a jack.

9 Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can dam‐age the vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, besure to fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

9 Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. Ifa jack is provided with the vehicle,it is designed only for changinga flat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

NoticeMake sure that the jack lift head is inthe correct position or you may dam‐age your vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.8. Remove all the wheel nuts.9. Remove the flat tire.

10. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

Vehicle Care 9-61

11. Install the spare tire.

9 Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later to re‐move all rust or dirt.

12. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

9 Warning

Never use oil or grease on bolts ornuts because the nuts might comeloose. The vehicle's wheel couldfall off, causing a crash.

14. Turn the wheel wrench or jackhandle counterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle.

9 Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the after‐market manufacturer when usingaccessory locking wheel nuts. SeeCapacities and Specifications3 11-2 for original equipmentwheel nut torque specifications.

NoticeImproperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid expensive brakerepairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications3 11-2 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

9-62 Vehicle Care

15. Tighten the wheel nuts in a criss‐cross sequence, as shown. SeeCapacities and Specifications3 11-2 .

16. Install the wheel cover if there isone.

17. Lower the jack all the way and re‐move it from under the vehicle.

18. Tighten the bolts firmly with thewheel wrench or jack handle.

How to use Jack for change thetire after installation Side Skirt LH/RHTake off CAP in the location you wantto change the tire as shown.

Instruction : Take off the CAP1. Use screw driver push on Rivet

1 time for unlocked and then takeoff Rivet 2 pcs. as shown.

2. Pull CAP out in the direction asshown. After take off CAP, thenplace the jack under the jackingpoint for change the tire.

After take off CAP, then place the jackunder the jacking point for change thetire.Install the CAP after removed the jackfrom jacking pointInstruction : Installation1. Push CAP into locked position as

shown.2. Install Rivet 2 pcs. to CAP and

then use screw driver push onRivet 1 time for locked CAP withSide skirt LH/RH as shown.

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools

9 Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passenger com‐partment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Hang the tire carrier on the sup‐port rod and tighten the bolt in thehole above the rear bumper toraise the tire carrier. SeeCapacities and Specifications3 11-2 .

2. Hook the cable and reinstall thehole cover in its original position.

3. Secure the jack and tools in theiroriginal location.

4. Secure the flat tire in the luggagecompartment.Do not store the flat tire below therear bumper where the spare tirewas located.

Vehicle Care 9-63

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon as pos‐sible.

Compact Spare Tire

9 Warning

Driving with more than one com‐pact spare tire at a time could re‐sult in loss of braking and han‐dling. This could lead to a crashand you or others could be injured.Use only one compact spare tire ata time.

The compact spare tire was fully in‐flated when the vehicle was new, butit can lose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. SeeVehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 for thecorrect inflation pressure.Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)when driving with a spare tire.The spare tire is for temporary emer‐gency use only. Replace it with a reg‐ular tire as soon as possible.

NoticeWhen the compact spare is instal‐led, do not take the vehicle throughan automatic car wash with guiderails. The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which can dam‐age the tire, wheel, and other partsof the vehicle.

Do not use the temporary spare onother vehicles.Do not mix the temporary spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. Theywill not fit. Keep the spare tire and itswheel together.NoticeTire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damage thevehicle and can damage the chainstoo. Do not use tire chains on thecompact spare.

Jump StartingFor more information about the vehi‐cle battery, see Battery 3 9-21 .If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

9 Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:■ They contain acid that can burn

you.■ They contain gas that can ex‐

plode or ignite.■ They contain enough electricity

to burn you.If you do not follow these steps ex‐actly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.

9-64 Vehicle Care

NoticeIgnoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the war‐ranty.Trying to start the vehicle by pushingor pulling it will not work, and it coulddamage the vehicle.1. Check the other vehicle. It must

have a 12-volt battery with a neg‐ative ground system.

NoticeOnly use a vehicle that has a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground forjump starting. If the other vehicledoes not have a 12-volt system witha negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged.2. Get the vehicles close enough so

the jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are not touch‐ing each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection youdo not want. You would not beable to start your vehicle, and thebad grounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the ve‐hicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehicles in‐volved in the jump start proce‐dure. Put automatic transmissionsin P (Park), and manual transmis‐sions in neutral before setting theparking brake.

NoticeIf the radio or other accessories areleft on during the jump starting pro‐cedure, they could be damaged. Therepairs would not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off the radioand other accessories when jumpstarting the vehicle.3. Turn off the ignition on both vehi‐

cles. Unplug unnecessary acces‐sories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and alllamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks, helping saveboth batteries and the radio.

4. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missing insula‐tion. If they do, you could get

a shock. The vehicles could alsobe damaged.Do not connect positive (+) to neg‐ative (−) or you will get a short thatwould damage the battery andmaybe other parts. Do not con‐nect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead

Vehicle Care 9-65

battery because this can causesparks.

9 Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

9 Warning

Using an open flame near a bat‐tery can cause battery gas to ex‐plode. People have been hurt do‐ing this, and some have been blin‐ded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to add wa‐ter to the battery installed in yournew vehicle. But if a battery hasfiller caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas couldbe present.Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. Ifyou accidentally get it in your eyesor on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help imme‐diately.

9 Warning

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the firstjumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the battery providingthe jump start. This is identified bya positive (+) sign on the batterycase or terminal.

6. Do not let the other end of thejumper cable touch metal. Con‐nect the other end of this samejumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the discharged battery.

7. Connect the first end of the otherjumper cable to the negative (−)terminal of the battery providingthe jump start. This is identified bya negative (−) sign on the batterycase or terminal.

8. Connect the other end of the sec‐ond jumper cable to ground on theother vehicle, such as a steelbracket bolted to the engine block.

9-66 Vehicle Care

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run the enginefor a while.

10. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entry transmitterto disarm your security system, ifequipped.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had thedead battery. If it will not start aftera few tries, it probably needs serv‐ice.

NoticeIf the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, elec‐trical shorting may occur and dam‐age the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle war‐ranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct or‐der, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

Disconnecting Jumper CablesOnce the previously discharged vehi‐cle is running:

1. Carefully disconnect the groundconnection (−). Begin with the ve‐hicle with the discharged battery.Leave the discharged vehicle run‐ning.

2. Disconnect the negative (−) cablefrom the vehicle with the good bat‐tery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) cablefrom both batteries. Store thejumper cables with the spare tire.

4. Operate the discharged vehiclefor approximately 20 minutes.This will allow the charging sys‐tem to recharge your battery.

5. If this discharge condition reoc‐curs, see your dealer.

TowingTowing the VehicleNoticeTo avoid damage, the disabled ve‐hicle should be towed with all fourwheels off the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on a carcarrier.

Consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service if the disabled vehiclemust be towed.To tow the vehicle behind another ve‐hicle for recreational purposes, suchas behind a motor home, see “Rec‐reational Vehicle Towing” in this sec‐tion.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind another ve‐hicle such as behind a motor home.The two most common types of rec‐reational vehicle towing are known asdinghy towing and dolly towing.

Vehicle Care 9-67

Dinghy towing is towing the vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground.Dolly towing is towing the vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known asa dolly.Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:■ What is the towing capacity of the

towing vehicle? Be sure to read thetow vehicle manufacturer's recom‐mendations.

■ What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles have re‐strictions on how far and how longthey can tow.

■ Is the proper towing equipment go‐ing to be used? See your dealer ortrailering professional for additionaladvice and equipment recommen‐dations.

■ Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle fora long trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed.

Dinghy TowingFront-wheel-drive and all-wheel-drivevehicles may be dinghy towed fromthe front. These vehicles can also betowed by placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options, see“Dolly Towing” following in this sec‐tion.For vehicles being dinghy towed, thevehicle should be run at the beginningof each day and at each RV fuel stopfor about five minutes. This will en‐sure proper lubrication of transmis‐sion components.

To tow the vehicle from the front withall four wheels on the ground:1. Position the vehicle that will be

towed.2. Shift an automatic transmission to

P (Park) or a manual transmissioninto 1 (First) and set the parkingbrake.

3. Secure the vehicle to the towingvehicle

4. Turn the ignition key to ACC/AC‐CESSORY to unlock the steeringwheel.

5. Shift an automatic transmission toN (Neutral) or a manual transmis‐sion to Neutral.

6. Turn off all accessories.7. To prevent the battery from drain‐

ing while the vehicle is beingtowed, remove the 2 amp IGN SWfuse from the instrument panelfuse block and store it in a safe lo‐cation. See Instrument PanelFuse Block 3 9-35 .

8. Release the parking brake.

9-68 Vehicle Care

NoticeIf the vehicle is towed without per‐forming each of the steps listed un‐der “Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged. Besure to follow all steps of the dinghytowing procedure prior to and aftertowing the vehicle.NoticeIf 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it could bedamaged. Never exceed 105 km/h(65 mph) while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:1. Set the parking brake.2. Shift an automatic transmission to

P (Park) or a manual transmissioninto 1 (First).

3. Reinstall the 2 amp IGN SW fuseto the instrument panel fuse block.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from theignition.

NoticeToo much or too little fluid can dam‐age the transmission. Be sure thatthe transmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.NoticeDo not tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if one ofthe front tires is a compact spare tire.Towing with two different tire sizeson the front of the vehicle can causesevere damage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)All-wheel-drive vehicles should not betowed with two wheels on the ground.To properly tow these vehicles, theyshould be placed on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of the groundor dinghy towed from the front.

Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the front withthe rear wheels on the ground, do thefollowing:1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.2. Shift an automatic transmission to

P (Park) or a manual transmissioninto 1 (First).

3. Set the parking brake.4. Clamp the steering wheel in

a straight-ahead position witha clamping device designed fortowing.

Vehicle Care 9-69

5. Remove the key from the ignition.6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle From the Rear

NoticeTowing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle war‐ranty. Never have the vehicle towedfrom the rear.

Appearance CareExterior CareWashing the VehicleTo preserve the vehicle's finish, washit often and out of direct sunlight.NoticeDo not use petroleum based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damage oc‐curs, it would not be covered by thevehicle's warranty. Approved clean‐ing products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct productusage, necessary safety precau‐tions, and appropriate disposal ofany vehicle care product.NoticeAvoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to the sur‐face of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

9-70 Vehicle Care

Rinse the vehicle well, before wash‐ing and after, to remove all cleaningagents completely. If they are allowedto dry on the surface, they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean cha‐mois or an all-cotton towel to avoidsurface scratches and water spotting.

Finish CareOccasional hand waxing or mild pol‐ishing of the vehicle should be doneto remove residue from the paint fin‐ish. See your dealer for approvedcleaning products.NoticeMachine compounding or aggres‐sive polishing on a basecoat/clear‐coat paint finish may damage it. Useonly non-abrasive waxes and pol‐ishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage the ve‐hicle's finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon

as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsRegularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if nec‐essary.For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or caustic soapto clean. A coating of wax, rubbed tohigh polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lensesand EmblemsUse only lukewarm or cold water,a soft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a mild de‐tergent. Wash the windshield thor‐oughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking.Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow and ice.

WeatherstripsApply silicone grease on weather‐strips to make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5

TiresUse a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Vehicle Care 9-71

NoticeUsing petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may dam‐age the paint finish and/or tires.When applying a tire dressing, al‐ways wipe off any overspray from allpainted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminum orChromeUse a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap and water.Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft, cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

NoticeChrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed with mag‐nesium, calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used on roadsfor conditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome with soapand water after exposure.NoticeTo avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals, abra‐sive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on alumi‐num or chrome-plated wheels. Useonly approved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car was that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning bushes. Dam‐age could occur and the repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis ComponentsVisually inspect front and rear sus‐pension and steering system for dam‐aged, loose, or missing parts or signsof wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, bind‐ing, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visu‐ally check constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component LubricationLubricate all key lock cylinders, hoodhinges, liftgate hinges, and steel fueldoor hinge unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal bet‐ter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody MaintenanceUse plain water to flush dirt and debrisfrom the vehicle's underbody. Yourdealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this. If not removed,rust and corrosion can develop.

9-72 Vehicle Care

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shop ap‐plies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corro‐sion protection.Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosion pro‐tection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageQuickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finish dam‐age can be corrected in your dealer'sbody and paint shop.

Chemical Paint SpottingAirborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfaces cuas‐ing blotchy, ring-shaped discolora‐tions, and small, irregular dark spotsetched into the paint surface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to home fur‐nishings can also permanently trans‐fer color to the vehicle's interior.Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild soapsolution, immediately remove handlotions, sunscreen, and insect repel‐lant from all interior surfaces or per‐manent damage may result.Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned to prevent permanentdamage. To prevent overspray, applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to re‐main on the surface being cleaned forextended periods of time.Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in the inte‐rior. Before using cleaners, read and

adhere to all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the doors and windows.To prevent damage, do not clean theinterior using the following cleaners ortechniques:■ Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soil fromany interior surface.

■ Never use a brush with stiff bristles.■ Never rub any surface aggressively

or with excessive pressure.■ Do not use laundry detergents or

dishwashing soaps with degreas‐ers. For liquid cleaners, use ap‐proximately 20 drops per 3.78L (1gal) of water. A concentrated soapsolution will leave a residue thatcreates streaks and attracts dirt. Donot use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

■ Do not heavily saturate the uphols‐tery when cleaning.

■ Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Vehicle Care 9-73

Interior GlassTo clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaning theinterior glass with plain water.NoticeTo prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners or aggres‐sive cleaning may damage the rearwindow defogger.

Fabric/CarpetStart by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingbrush attachment is being used dur‐ing vacuuming, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gently re‐move as much of the soil as possibleusing one of the following techniques:■ Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

■ For solid soils, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:1. Saturate a clean lint-free colorfast

cloth with water or club soda. Mi‐crofiber cloth is recommended toprevent lint transfer to the fabric orcarpet.

2. Remove excess moisture by gen‐tly wringing until water does notdrip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward the cen‐ter. Rotate the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently to preventforcing the soil in to the fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing the soiledarea until there is no longer anycolor transfer from the soil to thecleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completely re‐moved, use a mild soap solutionfollowed by only by club soda orplain water.

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use a com‐mercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area for col‐orfastness before using a commercial

upholster y cleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entire fab‐ric or carpet.Following the cleaning process, a pa‐per towel can be used to blot excessmoisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesUse a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith water to remove dust and loosedirt. For a more thorough cleaning,use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.NoticeSoaking or saturating leather, espe‐cially perforated leather, as well asother interior surfaces, may causepermanent damage. Wipe excessmoisture from these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to dry nat‐urally. Never use heat, steam, spotlifters or spot removers. Do not usecleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleaners con‐taining these solvents can perma‐nently change the appearance andfeel of leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

9-74 Vehicle Care

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshield undercertain conditions.NoticeUse of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle, blotimmediately and clean with a softcloth dampened with a mild soapsolution. Damage caused by airfresheners would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

9 Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

9 Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it can inter‐fere with the accelerator pedaland/or brake pedal. Interferencewith the pedals can cause unin‐tended acceleration and/or in‐creased stopping distance whichcan cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.■ The original equipment floor mats

were designed for your vehicle. Ifthe floor mats need replacing, it isrecommended that GM certifiedfloor mats be purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properly andmay interfere with the acceleratoror brake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interfere withthe pedals.

■ Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

■ Do not place anything on top of thedriver side floor mat.

■ Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

■ Do not place one floor mat on top ofanother.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by a button-type retainer.

Vehicle Care 9-75

Removing and Replacing the FloorMats1. Pull up on the rear of the floor mat

to unlock the retainer and remove.2. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer opening over the carpetretainer and snap into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat is prop‐erly secured and verify that it doesnot interfere with the acceleratoror brake pedal.

9-76 Vehicle Care

Service and Maintenance 10-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information ............... 10-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance ......... 10-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids andLubricants ........................... 10-5

Maintenance ReplacementParts ................................... 10-6

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records ............ 10-8

General Information

NoticeMaintenance intervals, checks, in‐spections, recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keep thisvehicle in good working condition.Damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you are respon‐sible for the scheduled maintenancein this section. We recommend hav‐ing your dealer perform these serv‐ices. Proper vehicle maintenancehelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, improves fueleconomy, and reduces vehicle emis‐sions for better air quality.Because of all the different ways peo‐ple use vehicles, maintenance needsvary. The vehicle might need morefrequent checks and services. Pleaseread the information under ScheduledMaintenance. To keep the vehicle ingood condition, see your dealer.

The maintenance schedule is for ve‐hicles that:■ Carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 .

■ Are driven on reasonable road sur‐faces within legal driving limits.

■ Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 3 8-34 .

9 Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if you havethe required know-how and theproper tools and equipment. If indoubt, see your dealer to havea qualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork 3 9-3 .

At your dealer, you can be certain thatyou will receive the highest level ofservice available. Your dealer hasspecially trained service technicians,

10-2 Service and Maintenance

uses genuine replacement parts, aswell as, up-to-date tools and equip‐ment to ensure fast and accurate di‐agnostics.The proper replacement parts, fluids,and lubricants to use are listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 andMaintenance Replacement Parts3 10-6 . We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.Rotation of New TiresTo maintain ride, handling, and per‐formance of the vehicle, it is importantthat the first rotation service for newtires be performed. Tires should berotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles.See Tire Rotation (Long WheelBase) 3 9-45 .

Scheduled Maintenance

When the Change Engine OilLight DisplaysChange engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil 3 9-7 .When the change engine oil light dis‐plays, service is required for the vehi‐cle as soon as possible, within thenext 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving un‐der the best conditions, the engine oillife system might not indicate theneed for vehicle service for more thana year. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset. Yourdealer has trained service technicianswho will perform this work and resetthe system. If the engine oil life sys‐tem is reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.SeeEngine Oil Life System 3 9-10 .

Every Engine Oil Change■ Change engine oil and filter. Reset

oil life system. See Engine Oil3 9-7 and Engine Oil Life System3 9-10 .An Emission ControlService.

■ Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4Engines) 3 9-14 .

■ Engine cooling system inspection.Visual inspection of hoses, pipes,fittings, and clamps and replace‐ment, if needed.

■ Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 .

■ Windshield wiper blade inspectionfor wear, cracking, or contamina‐tion and windshield and wiper bladecleaning, if contaminated. SeeExterior Care 3 9-69 . Worn or dam‐aged wiper blade replacement. SeeWiper Blade Replacement 3 9-24 .

■ Tire inflation pressures check. SeeTire Pressure 3 9-40 .

■ Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection 3 9-44.


■ Rotate tires if necessary. See TireRotation (Long Wheel Base)3 9-45 .

■ Fluids visual leak check (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).A leak in any system must be re‐paired and the fluid level checked.

■ Engine air cleaner filter inspection.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter3 9-13 .

■ Brake system inspection (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).

■ Steering and suspension inspec‐tion. Visual inspection for dam‐aged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear.

■ Body hinges and latches, key lockcylinders, folding seat hardware,and sunroof (if equipped) lubrica‐tion. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 3 10-5 . Morefrequent lubrication may be re‐quired when the vehicle is exposedto a corrosive environment. Apply‐ing silicone grease on weather‐strips with a clean cloth makesthem last longer, seal better, andnot stick or squeak.

■ Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck3 3-20 .

■ Fuel system inspection for damageor leaks.

■ Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose or dam‐aged components.

Additional Required ServicesEvery 12 000 km/7,500 Miles■ Rotate tires. Tires should be rota‐

ted every 12 000 km/7,500 miles.See Tire Rotation (Long WheelBase) 3 9-45 .

At Each Fuel Stop■ Engine oil level check. See Engine

Oil 3 9-7 .■ Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4Engines)3 9-14 .

■ Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 .

Once a Month■ Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure 3 9-40.■ Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection 3 9-44 .■ Sunroof track and seal inspection,

if equipped. See Sunroof 3 2-13 .Once a Year■ See Starter Switch Check 3 9-22 .■ See Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control Function Check3 9-23 .

■ See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 3 9-23 .

■ See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check 3 9-23 .

■ Accelerator pedal check for dam‐age, high effort, or binding. Replaceif needed.

■ Underbody flushing service.


■ Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service: Visuallyinspect gas strut, if equipped, forsigns of wear, cracks, or other dam‐age. Check the hold open ability ofthe gas strut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.

Once Every Two Years■ Brake hydraulic fluid replacement.First Engine Oil Change After Every40 000 km/25,000 Miles■ Passenger compartment air filter

replacement (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). More fre‐quent replacement may be neededif you drive in areas with heavy traf‐fic, areas with poor air quality, orareas with high dust levels. Re‐placement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced air flow, win‐dows fogging up, or odors. Yourdealer can help you determinewhen it is the right time to replacethe filter.

First Engine Oil Change After Every60 000 km/40,000 Miles■ Automatic transmission fluid

change (severe service) for vehi‐cles mainly driven in heavy city traf‐fic in hot weather, in hilly or moun‐tainous terrain, when frequentlytowing a trailer, or used for taxi, po‐lice, or delivery service. SeeAutomatic TransmissionFluid3 9-11 .

First Engine Oil Change After Every90 000 km/60,000 Miles■ Spark plug replacement and spark

plug wires inspection. An EmissionControl Service.

First Engine Oil Change After Every120 000 km/80,000 Miles■ Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid3 9-11 .

First Engine Oil Change After Every240 000 km/150,000 Miles■ Engine cooling system drain, flush,

and refill (or every five years,whichever occurs first). See Engine

Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4Engines) 3 9-14 . An EmissionControl Service.

■ Engine drive belts inspection forfraying, excessive cracks, or obvi‐ous damage (or every 10 years,whichever occurs first). Replace, ifneeded.


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids and LubricantsUsage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilThe engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils meeting thisspecification can be identified with the dexos certification mark. Look for and use only an engineoil that displays the dexos certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil3 9-7 .

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant(2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 .

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid.

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power SteeringSystem GM Power Steering Fluid. See your dealer.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer.

Hood Latch Assembly,Secondary Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer.

WeatherstripConditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant or Dielectric Silicone Grease. See your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.0L L4 Engine — —

2.4L L4 Engine 96628890 —

Engine Oil Filter

2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 96868253 —

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 96800069 —

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41–103

Wiper Blades


Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 25925618 —

Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 25925620 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the typeof services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed








Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationIdentification Plate .................. 11-1

Vehicle DataCapacities and

Specifications ...................... 11-2Engine Drive Belt Routing ...... 11-4

Vehicle IdentificationIdentification PlateThe technical data is determined inaccordance with European Commun‐ity standards. We reserve the right tomake modifications. Specifications inthe vehicle documents always havepriority over those given in this man‐ual. The Vehicle Identification Num‐ber (VIN) is on the vehicle identifica‐tion plate, attached to the top of thefront panel support, visible when thehood is open. The vehicle identifica‐tion plate may also list, in kilograms,the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), theGross Train Weight (GTW) and themaximum front and rear axle loadsrespectively. Observe these limitswhen using the full load or towing ca‐pacity of the vehicle.Information on identification plate:■ Manufacturer■ Trim level■ Color code■ Type approval number■ Vehicle Identification Number

■ Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight■ Permissible Gross Train Weight■ Maximum permissible front axle

load■ Maximum permissible rear axle

loadThe Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is also engraved on the topright-hand side of the bulkhead nearthe center of the engine firewall. En‐gine identifier code and engine num‐ber are stamped on the cylinder blockunder the engine exhaust manifold(petrol engines) or the intake manifold(diesel engines).

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code helps identifythe vehicle's engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 3 11-2 for the vehi‐cle's engine code.

11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle DataCapacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 3 10-5 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerantlabel located under the hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System — Engine

2.0L L4 Engine RPO LNP 9.0 L 9.5 qt

2.4L L4 Engine RPO LE5 8.5 L 9.0 qt


Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L L4 Engine RPO LNP 5.6 L 5.9 qt



Fuel Tank 65.0 L 17.2 gal

Transmission Fluid

Technical Data 11-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Automatic 6-Speed RPO MH7 6.7 L 7.1 qt

Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHC 6.7 L 7.1 qt

Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHJ 7.8 L 8.2 qt

Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHK 7.8 L 8.2 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Engine RPO LNP Y Automatic —

2.4L L4 Engine RPO LE9 1 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

11-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L Engines

3.0L Engine

2.0L Engines

Customer Information 12-1

CustomerInformation

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy ................................ 12-1

Event Data Recorders ............ 12-1Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ............ 12-2

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number of so‐phisticated computers that record in‐formation about the vehicle’s per‐formance and how it is driven. For ex‐ample, the vehicle uses computermodules to monitor and control en‐gine and transmission performance,to monitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy airbags ina crash, and, if so equipped, to pro‐vide antilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help your dealertechnician service the vehicle. Somemodules may also store data abouthow you operate the vehicle, such asrate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may also re‐tain the owner’s personal preferen‐ces, such as radio pre-sets, seat po‐sitions, and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Re‐corder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crashor near crash-like situations, such asan airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist in un‐derstanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynam‐ics and safety systems for a short pe‐riod of time, typically 30 seconds orless. The EDR in this vehicle may re‐cord such data as:■ How various systems in the vehicle

were operating.■ Whether or not the driver and pas‐

senger safety belts were buckled/fastened.

■ How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

■ How fast the vehicle was traveling.This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

12-2 Customer Information

NoticeEDR data is recorded by the vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data is recorded by theEDR under normal driving condi‐tions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash loca‐tion) is recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired duringa crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the spe‐cial equipment, can read the informa‐tion if they have access to the vehicleor the EDR.GM will not access this data or shareit with others except: with the consentof the vehicle owner or, if the vehicleis leased, with the consent of the les‐see; in response to an official requestof police or similar government office;as part of GM's defense of litigation

through the discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GM collectsor receives may also be used for GMresearch needs or may be madeavailable to others for research pur‐poses, where a need is shown andthe data is not tied to a specific vehicleor vehicle owner.

Radio Frequency Identification(RFID)RFID technology is used in some ve‐hicles for functions such as tire pres‐sure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection withconveniences such as key fobs for re‐mote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmittersfor garage door openers. RFID tech‐nology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or linkwith any other GM system containingpersonal information.

13-1

Index AA/C BUTTON .............................. 7-6Accessories and Modifications.... 9-2Accessory Power....................... 8-17Active Head Restraints................ 3-3Adding Equipment to the Airbag-

Equipped Vehicle................... 3-30Add-On Electrical Equipment.... 8-46Adjustments

Lumbar, Front Seats................ 3-5Airbag

Adding Equipment to theVehicle................................... 3-30Light On-Off........................... 5-15

Airbag On-Off Light................... 5-15Airbag On-Off Switch................. 3-27Airbag Readiness Light............. 5-15Airbags

On-Off Light........................... 5-15On-Off Switch......................... 3-27Readiness Light..................... 5-15Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles................................. 3-29System Check........................ 3-21

Airbag System........................... 3-21Check..................................... 3-30How Does an AirbagRestrain?................................ 3-25

What Makes an AirbagInflate?................................... 3-25What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?...................... 3-26When Should an AirbagInflate?................................... 3-24Where Are the Airbags?........ 3-22

Airbag System Check................ 3-30Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine.......... 9-13AIR CONDITIONING .................. 7-5AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE

KNOB ...................................... 7-3AIR VENTS................................. 7-1Alarm System

Anti-theft................................... 2-7All-Wheel Drive................ 9-25, 9-22

Light....................................... 5-21All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWD

Only)...................................... 5-21Antilock Brake System (ABS).... 8-25

Warning Light......................... 5-20Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light......................... 5-20Anti-theft

Alarm System........................... 2-7Locking System........................ 2-7

Anti-Theft Alarm System........... 5-27Anti-Theft Locking System ......... 2-7

13-2

Appearance CareExterior................................... 9-69Interior.................................... 9-72

Ashtrays.................................... 5-10Automatic

Dimming Mirrors..................... 2-10Door Locks............................... 2-4Level Control.......................... 8-30

Automatic Dimming Mirror......... 2-10Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror...................................... 2-10Automatic Door Locks................. 2-4Automatic Headlamp Leveling

System Light.......................... 5-26AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE

CONTROL ............................ 7-10Automatic Transmission............ 8-22

Fluid....................................... 9-11Manual Mode......................... 8-24Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck..................................... 9-23

Automatic Transmission Fluid... 9-11Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control Function Check. 9-23Axle, Rear.................................. 9-22

BBattery....................................... 9-21

Jump Starting......................... 9-63Power Protection...................... 6-6

Battery Power Protection............. 6-6Blade Replacement, Wiper........ 9-24Brake Assist.............................. 8-28Brake Fluid................................ 9-20Brakes....................................... 9-19

Antilock.................................. 8-25Assist..................................... 8-28Fluid....................................... 9-20Parking................................... 8-26

Brake System Warning Light..... 5-19Braking........................................ 8-3Break-In, New Vehicle............... 8-13Bulb Replacement............ 9-27, 9-31

Fog Lamps............................. 9-29Halogen Bulbs....................... 9-27Headlamp Aiming................... 9-25Headlamps............................. 9-27Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and Parking Lamps.... 9-27High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting......................... 9-27License Plate Lamps............. 9-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-upLamps.................................... 9-30

Buying New Tires...................... 9-46Buzzers, Warning...................... 5-28

CCapacities and Specifications. . . 11-2Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust...................... 8-20Liftgate..................................... 2-6Winter Driving.......................... 8-7

CargoCover....................................... 4-3Management System............... 4-3

Cargo Cover................................ 4-3Cargo Management System........ 4-3Cautions, Danger, and Warnings 1-1Center Console Storage ............. 4-2Chains, Tire............................... 9-48Change Engine Oil Light........... 5-24Charging System Light.............. 5-17Check

Engine Light........................... 5-17Ignition Transmission Lock.... 9-23

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children. . . 3-33Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children............................ 3-38Older Children........................ 3-31Securing.............. 3-42, 3-43, 3-44Systems................................. 3-35

Child Restraint Systems............ 3-35Cigarette Lighter.......................... 5-9Circuit Breakers......................... 9-31

13-3

CleaningExterior Care.......................... 9-69Interior Care........................... 9-72

Clock........................................... 5-8Cluster, Instrument........... 5-11, 5-12Compact Spare Tire.................. 9-63Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant.... 9-50Continuous Damping Control

(CDC)..................................... 8-30Control of a Vehicle..................... 8-3CONTROL PANEL...................... 7-2Convenience Net......................... 4-3Convex Mirrors............................ 2-9Coolant

Engine.................................... 9-14Engine Temperature Gauge. . 5-14Engine Temperature WarningLight....................................... 5-23

COOLING ................................... 7-6Cover

Cargo....................................... 4-3Cruise Control........................... 8-31

Light....................................... 5-27Cruise Control Light................... 5-27Cupholders.................................. 4-1

DDanger, Warnings, and

Cautions................................... 1-1Data Recorders, Event.............. 12-1

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). . 6-3DEFROSTING .......................... 7-12DEFROSTING AND

DEFOGGING .......................... 7-8Delayed Locking.......................... 2-4Descent Control System (DCS). 8-29Descent Control System Light... 5-21Diesel

Starting Your Engine.............. 8-16Diesel Particulate Filter............. 8-20Diesel Particulate Filter Light..... 5-23Differential, Limited-Slip............ 8-30Different Size Tires and Wheels 9-46DISPLAY PANEL........................ 7-9Doing Your Own Service Work.... 9-3Dome Lamps .............................. 6-5Door

Ajar Light................................ 5-27Delayed Locking...................... 2-4Locks........................................ 2-4Power Locks............................ 2-4

Door Ajar Light.......................... 5-27Drive Belt Routing, Engine........ 11-4Drive Systems

All-Wheel Drive............. 9-25, 9-22Driving

Better Fuel Economy............... 8-2Characteristics and TowingTips........................................ 8-37

Drunk....................................... 8-2Highway Hypnosis................... 8-6Hill and Mountain Roads.......... 8-7If the Vehicle is Stuck............... 8-9Loss of Control......................... 8-5Off-Road Recovery.................. 8-5Vehicle Load Limits................ 8-10Wet Roads............................... 8-6Winter....................................... 8-7

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips............................ 8-37

Driving for Better Fuel Economy. 8-2Driving on Wet Roads................. 8-6Drunk Driving............................... 8-2

EECO Button............................... 8-24Economy Mode

Fuel........................................ 8-24Electrical Equipment, Add-On... 8-46Electrical System

Engine Compartment FuseBlock...................................... 9-32Fuses and Circuit Breakers.... 9-31Instrument Panel Fuse Block. 9-35Overload................................ 9-31

Electrical System Overload....... 9-31Electric Parking Brake Light...... 5-20Electronic Stability Control........ 8-28

13-4

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)..................................... 8-28

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light.............. 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light....................... 5-22

Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light........................ 5-22

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter.................... 9-13Change Engine Oil Light........ 5-24Check and Service EngineSoon Light.............................. 5-17Compartment Overview.... 9-4, 9-6Coolant................................... 9-14Coolant Temperature Gauge. 5-14Coolant TemperatureWarning Light......................... 5-23Drive Belt Routing.................. 11-4Exhaust.................................. 8-20Gasoline Starting................... 8-15Overheating........................... 9-17Overspeed Warning Light...... 5-26Pressure Light........................ 5-24Running While Parked........... 8-21Starting Your Diesel............... 8-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter........... 9-13Engine Compartment Fuse

Block...................................... 9-32

Engine Compartment Overview(2.0L RHD)............................... 9-4

Engine Compartment Overview(2.4L RHD)............................... 9-6

Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4LL4 Engines)............................ 9-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge.................................... 5-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light......................... 5-23

Engine Drive Belt Routing......... 11-4Engine Exhaust......................... 8-20Engine Oil.................................... 9-7

Life System............................ 9-10Engine Oil Life System.............. 9-10Engine Oil Pressure Light......... 5-24Engine Overheating.................. 9-17Engine Overspeed Warning

Light....................................... 5-26Engines

Diesel Fuel............................. 8-34Petrol Fuel.............................. 8-34

Equipment, Towing.................... 8-43Event Data Recorders............... 12-1Exterior Care............................. 9-69Exterior Lamp Controls ............... 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder...... 6-2

FFAN CONTROL KNOB .............. 7-3Filling a Portable Fuel

Container............................... 8-36Filling the Tank.......................... 8-35Filter

Diesel Particulate................... 8-20Engine Air Cleaner................. 9-13

Flashers, Hazard Warning........... 6-3Flash-to-Pass.............................. 6-2Flat Tire..................................... 9-48

Changing................................ 9-56Floor Mats................................. 9-74Fluid

Automatic Transmission......... 9-11Brakes.................................... 9-20Power Steering...................... 9-18Washer................................... 9-19

Fog Lamp Light, Rear................ 5-27Fog Lamps................................ 9-29

Bulb Replacement................. 9-29Front......................................... 6-4Rear......................................... 6-4

Folding Mirrors............................ 2-9Folding Mirrors (C140)................ 2-9Folding Seatback......................... 3-7Front Fog Lamp

Light....................................... 5-26Front Fog Lamp Light................ 5-26

13-5

Front Fog Lamps ........................ 6-4Front Seats

Adjustment............................... 3-3Heated..................................... 3-7

Front Storage.............................. 4-2Fuel........................................... 8-34

Diesel Engines....................... 8-34Economy Light....................... 5-25Economy, Driving for Better..... 8-2Filling a Portable FuelContainer............................... 8-36Filling the Tank....................... 8-35Gauge.................................... 5-13Low Fuel Warning Light......... 5-25Petrol Engines........................ 8-34Running out of Fuel............... 8-35Water in Fuel.......................... 8-34Water in Fuel Warning Light. . 5-25

Fuel Economy Light................... 5-25Fuel Economy Mode................. 8-24Fuel for Diesel Engines............. 8-34Fuel for Petrol Engines.............. 8-34Fuel Gauge (C140).................... 5-13Fuses

Engine Compartment FuseBlock...................................... 9-32Fuses and Circuit Breakers.... 9-31Instrument Panel Fuse Block. 9-35

Fuses and Circuit Breakers....... 9-31

GGasoline Engine, Starting......... 8-15Gate Ajar Light.......................... 5-28Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature. 5-14Fuel........................................ 5-13Odometer............................... 5-13Speedometer......................... 5-13Tachometer............................ 5-13Trip Odometer........................ 5-13Warning Lights andIndicators............................... 5-10

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......... 7-9General Information................... 10-1

Service and Maintenance...... 10-1Towing................................... 8-37Vehicle Care............................ 9-2

General Towing Information...... 8-37Glove Box.................................... 4-1

HHalogen Bulbs........................... 9-27Hazard Warning Flashers............ 6-3Headlamp Aiming...................... 9-25Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer................................... 6-2Headlamp Range Adjustment..... 6-2

HeadlampsAiming.................................... 9-25Bulb Replacement................. 9-27Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)....................................... 6-3Flash-to-Pass........................... 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting......................... 9-27High-Beam On Light.............. 5-26High/Low Beam Changer......... 6-2Range Adjustment................... 6-2Washer..................................... 5-8

Headlamps, Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps................ 9-27

Headlamp Washer ...................... 5-8Head Restraints........................... 3-2

Active....................................... 3-3Healamps

Automatic Headlamp LevelingSystem Light.......................... 5-26

Heated Front Seats..................... 3-7Heated Mirrors........................... 2-10HEATING ................................... 7-7High-Beam On Light.................. 5-26High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Lighting.................................. 9-27Highway Hypnosis....................... 8-6Hill and Mountain Roads............. 8-7Hood............................................ 9-3

13-6

Horn............................................. 5-6How Does an Airbag Restrain?. 3-25How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly.................................. 3-12How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly (RHD)...................... 3-12

IIdentification Plate..................... 11-1If a Tire Goes Flat...................... 9-48If the Vehicle Is Stuck.................. 8-9Ignition Positions....................... 8-14Ignition Transmission Lock

Check..................................... 9-23Immobilizer

Light....................................... 5-25Immobilizer Light....................... 5-25Immobilizer Operation................. 2-8Infants and Young Children....... 3-33Infants and Young Children,

Restraints............................... 3-33Instrument Cluster............ 5-11, 5-12Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel

KM)........................................ 5-11Instrument Cluster (C140 Gen

RHD GAS KM)....................... 5-12Instrument Panel

Storage Area............................ 4-1Instrument Panel Fuse Block.... 9-35

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl .................................... 6-5

Instrument Panel Overview(C140 (RHD))........................... 5-3

Instrument Panel Storage........... 4-1Interior Care.............................. 9-72Introduction.................................. 1-1

JJump Starting............................ 9-63

KKeyless Entry

Remote (RKE) System............. 2-2Keys............................................ 2-1

LLamps

Daytime Running (DRL)........... 6-3Dome....................................... 6-5Exterior Controls...................... 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder. . 6-2Front Fog................................. 6-4Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and Parking Lamps.... 9-27License Plate......................... 9-30Malfunction Indicator.............. 5-17Reading.................................... 6-6Rear Fog.................................. 6-4

Lap Belt..................................... 3-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt..................... 3-16LATCH, Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children............... 3-38LATCH System

Replacing Parts after a Crash 3-42Level Control

Automatic............................... 8-30License Plate Lamp................... 9-30Liftgate......................................... 2-6

Carbon Monoxide..................... 2-6Light

Diesel Particulate Filter.......... 5-23Electronic Stability Control(ESC), Off.............................. 5-22

Lighter, Cigarette......................... 5-9Lighting

Illumination Control.................. 6-5Lights

Airbag On-Off......................... 5-15Airbag Readiness.................. 5-15All-Wheel Drive...................... 5-21Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning.................................. 5-20Automatic Headlamp LevelingSystem................................... 5-26Brake System Warning.......... 5-19Change Engine Oil................. 5-24Charging System................... 5-17Cruise Control........................ 5-27

13-7

Descent Control System........ 5-21Door Ajar................................ 5-27Electric Parking Brake............ 5-20Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning.................................. 5-23Engine Oil Pressure............... 5-24Engine Overspeed Warning... 5-26Flash-to-Pass........................... 6-2Fog Lamp, Rear..................... 5-27Front Fog Lamp..................... 5-26Fuel Economy........................ 5-25Gate Ajar................................ 5-28High-Beam On....................... 5-26High/Low Beam Changer......... 6-2Immobilizer............................. 5-25Low Engine Oil Level............. 5-24Low Fuel Warning.................. 5-25Safety Belt Reminders........... 5-14Service Vehicle Soon............. 5-19Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) Warning...... 5-22Trailer Indicator...................... 5-27Ultrasonic Parking Sensor..... 5-22Wait to Start........................... 5-23Water in Fuel Warning........... 5-25

Limited-Slip Differential............. 8-30Locking Systems, Anti-theft......... 2-7Lockout Protection....................... 2-5

LocksAutomatic Door........................ 2-4Delayed Locking...................... 2-4Door......................................... 2-4Lockout Protection................... 2-5Power Door.............................. 2-4Safety....................................... 2-5

Loss of Control............................ 8-5Low Engine Oil Level Light........ 5-24Low Engine Oil Level Light

(Diesel Only).......................... 5-24Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System)..... 3-38Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) (AllOther Markets)....................... 3-38

Low Fuel Warning Light............. 5-25Lumbar Adjustment..................... 3-5

Front Seats.............................. 3-5

MMaintenance

Records.................................. 10-8Maintenance Records............... 10-8Maintenance Replacement

Parts....................................... 10-6Maintenance Schedule

Recommended Fluids andLubricants.............................. 10-5Scheduled Maintenance........ 10-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp....... 5-17MANUAL CONTROL ................ 7-11Manual Mode............................. 8-24Manual Rearview Mirror............ 2-10Mirrors

Automatic Dimming................ 2-10Automatic Dimming Rearview 2-10Convex..................................... 2-9Folding..................................... 2-9Heated................................... 2-10Manual Rearview................... 2-10Power....................................... 2-9

Monitor System, Tire Pressure.. 9-43

NNet, Convenience........................ 4-3New Vehicle Break-In................ 8-13

OOdometer.................................. 5-13

Trip......................................... 5-13Off-Road

Recovery.................................. 8-5Off-Road Recovery...................... 8-5Oil

Change Engine Oil Light........ 5-24Engine...................................... 9-7Engine Oil Life System........... 9-10Low Engine Oil Level Light.... 5-24Pressure Light........................ 5-24

13-8

Older Children........................... 3-31Older Children, Restraints......... 3-31OPERATING TIPS FOR

VENTILATION SYSTEM ....... 7-13Outlets

Power....................................... 5-9OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

DISPLAY ............................... 7-12Overheating, Engine................. 9-17Overspeed Warning Light......... 5-26

PPark

Shifting into............................ 8-18Shifting out of......................... 8-19

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check................. 9-23

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic................... 8-33Brake...................................... 8-26Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check................. 9-23Over Things That Burn........... 8-20Ultrasonic Sensor Light.......... 5-22

Parking Brake............................ 8-26Parking over Things That Burn. 8-20Power

Door Locks............................... 2-4Mirrors...................................... 2-9Outlets...................................... 5-9

Protection, Battery................... 6-6Retained Accessory (RAP).... 8-17Seat Adjustment....................... 3-4Steering Fluid......................... 9-18Windows................................ 2-11

Power Door Locks....................... 2-4Power Seat Adjustment............... 3-4Power Steering Fluid................. 9-18Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts.. 3-18Privacy

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)............... 12-2

RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID)............... 12-2Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID).................................... 12-2Reading Lamps .......................... 6-6Rear Axle................................... 9-22Rear Fog Lamp Light................. 5-27Rear Fog Lamps ......................... 6-4Rear Seats.................................. 3-8Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming................ 2-10Rearview Mirrors....................... 2-10Rear Window Washer/Wiper....... 5-7Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 5-7RECIRCULATION MODE

BUTTON ................................. 7-4

Reclining Seatbacks.................... 3-5Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation.................................. 9-42Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants.............................. 10-5Records

Maintenance.......................... 10-8Recreational Vehicle Towing..... 9-66Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System..................................... 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation.................... 2-2Replacement Bulbs................... 9-31Replacement Parts

Airbags................................... 3-30Maintenance.......................... 10-6

Replacing Airbag System.......... 3-30Replacing Airbag System Parts

after a Crash ......................... 3-30Replacing LATCH System Parts

After a Crash.......................... 3-42Replacing Safety Belt System

Parts after a Crash ................ 3-20Restraints

Where to Put.......................... 3-37Retained Accessory Power

(RAP)..................................... 8-17Ride Control Systems................ 8-28

13-9

Electronic Stability (ESC)....... 8-28Enhanced Traction System(ETS)...................................... 8-30

RoadsDriving, Wet............................. 8-6

RoofSunroof.................................. 2-13

Roof Rack System....................... 4-4Rotation, Tires........................... 9-45Routing, Engine Drive Belt........ 11-4Running Out of Fuel.................. 8-35Running the Vehicle While

Parked.................................... 8-21

SSafety Belt Care ....................... 3-20Safety Belt Reminders............... 5-14Safety Belts............................... 3-10

Care....................................... 3-20How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly.................................. 3-12Lap Belt.................................. 3-19Lap-Shoulder Belt.................. 3-16Reminders.............................. 5-14Replacing after a Crash......... 3-20Use During Pregnancy........... 3-18

Safety Belts (All except Aus,NZ)......................................... 3-10

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy.............................. 3-18

Safety Locks................................ 2-5Safety System Check................ 3-20Scheduled Maintenance............ 10-2Sealant Kit, Tire......................... 9-50Seat Adjustment.......................... 3-3Seats

Adjustment, Front..................... 3-3Folding Seatback..................... 3-7Head Restraints....................... 3-2Heated Front............................ 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front....... 3-5Power Adjustment, Front......... 3-4Rear......................................... 3-8Reclining Seatbacks................ 3-5

Securing Child Restraints....................................... 3-42, 3-43, 3-44

Securing Child Restraints (FrontSeat with Airbag Off Switch). . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints (FrontSeat without Airbag OffSwitch)................................... 3-43

Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat)...................................... 3-42

SecurityVehicle..................................... 2-7

ServiceMaintenance Records............ 10-8Accessories and Modifications. 9-2Doing Your Own Work............. 9-3

Engine Soon Light................. 5-17Maintenance, GeneralInformation............................. 10-1Vehicle Soon Light................. 5-19

Service Vehicle Soon Light....... 5-19Servicing the Airbag.................. 3-29Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle................................... 3-29Shifting

Into Park................................. 8-18Out of Park............................. 8-19

Shifting Into Park ...................... 8-18Shifting out of Park.................... 8-19Shift Lock Control Function

Check, AutomaticTransmission.......................... 9-23

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change. 6-3Spare Tire

Compact................................. 9-63Specifications and Capacities. . . 11-2Speedometer............................. 5-13Speed Sensitive Power Steering

(SSPS) Warning Light............ 5-22Starter Switch Check................. 9-22Starting the Diesel Engine......... 8-16Starting the Gasoline Engine... . 8-15Starting Your Diesel Engine...... 8-16Steering....................................... 8-4

Fluid, Power........................... 9-18

13-10

Wheel Adjustment.................... 5-5Wheel Controls........................ 5-5

Steering Wheel Adjustment(C140)...................................... 5-5

Steering Wheel Controls ............ 5-5Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

Bulb Replacement................. 9-30Storage Areas

Cargo Cover............................. 4-3Cargo Management System.... 4-3Center Console........................ 4-2Convenience Net..................... 4-3Front......................................... 4-2Glove Box................................ 4-1Instrument Panel...................... 4-1Roof Rack System................... 4-4Sunglasses.............................. 4-2

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit...................... 9-56

Stuck Vehicle............................... 8-9Sunglasses Storage.................... 4-2Sunglass Storage........................ 4-2Sunroof...................................... 2-13Sun Visors................................. 2-12Switches

Airbag On-Off......................... 3-27Symbols....................................... 1-2

SystemRoof Rack................................ 4-4

TTachometer............................... 5-13Taillamps

Bulb Replacement................. 9-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps.................................... 9-30

TEMPERATURE CONTROLKNOB ...................................... 7-3

TEMPERATURE UNITCHANGE ............................... 7-12

Theft-Deterrent Systems............. 2-8Time............................................ 5-8Tire Chains................................ 9-48Tire Changing............................ 9-56Tire Inspection........................... 9-44Tire Pressure............................. 9-40Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation............................... 9-44Tire Pressure Monitor System... 9-43Tire Rotation (Long Wheel

Base)...................................... 9-45Tires.......................................... 9-39

Buying New Tires................... 9-46Chains.................................... 9-48Changing................................ 9-56Compact Spare...................... 9-63

Different Size......................... 9-46If a Tire Goes Flat.................. 9-48Inflation Monitor System........ 9-44Inspection............................... 9-44Pressure Monitor System....... 9-43Rotation.................................. 9-45Sealant and Compressor Kit. . 9-50Sealant and Compressor Kit,Storing.................................... 9-56Wheel Alignment and TireBalance.................................. 9-47Wheel Replacement............... 9-47When It Is Time for NewTires....................................... 9-45Winter..................................... 9-39

Tire Sealant and CompressorKit........................................... 9-50

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires....................................... 8-43

TowingDriving Characteristics........... 8-37Equipment.............................. 8-43General Information............... 8-37Recreational Vehicle.............. 9-66Trailer..................................... 8-40Trailer Sway Control (TSC).... 8-46Vehicle................................... 9-66

Towing Equipment..................... 8-43Towing the Vehicle.................... 9-66

13-11

TractionLimited-Slip Differential.......... 8-30

TrailerSway Control (TSC)............... 8-46

Trailer Indicator Light................. 5-27Trailer Sway Control (TSC)....... 8-46Trailer Towing............................ 8-40Transmission

Automatic............................... 8-22Fluid, Automatic..................... 9-11

Trip Odometer........................... 5-13Turn and Lane-Change Signals . 6-3Turn Signal

Bulb Replacement................. 9-30

UUltrasonic Parking Assist........... 8-33Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 -

For Vehicles with 3 Sensors). 8-33Ultrasonic Parking Sensor Light

............................................... 5-22Using This Manual....................... 1-1

VVehicle

Control..................................... 8-3Load Limits............................. 8-10Security.................................... 2-7Service Soon Light................. 5-19Towing................................... 9-66

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit...................... 9-56Tire Pressure......................... 9-40

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy................................... 12-1

Vehicle IdentificationPlate....................................... 11-1

Vehicle Load Limits................... 8-10VENTILATION............................. 7-7Visors........................................ 2-12

WWait to Start Light...................... 5-23Wait-to-Start Light (Diesel Only) 5-23Warning

Brake System Light................ 5-19Warning Buzzers....................... 5-28Warning Lights, Gauges, and

Indicators............................... 5-10Warnings..................................... 1-1

Cautions and Danger............... 1-1Hazard Flashers....................... 6-3

Washer Fluid............................. 9-19Washer, Headlamps.................... 5-8Water in Fuel............................. 8-34Water in Fuel Warning Light...... 5-25Water in Fuel Warning Light

(Diesel Only).......................... 5-25Weight of the Trailer.................. 8-41

Weight of the Trailer Tongue..... 8-42What Makes an Airbag Inflate?. 3-25What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates?...................... 3-26Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance.................................. 9-47Wheel Replacement.................. 9-47Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance... 9-47Different Size......................... 9-46Replacement.......................... 9-47

When It Is Time for New Tires... 9-45When Should an Airbag Inflate?

............................................... 3-24Where Are the Airbags? ........... 3-22Where to Put the Restraint ....... 3-37Windows.................................... 2-11

Power..................................... 2-11Windshield

Wiper/Washer.......................... 5-6Windshield Wiper/Washer .......... 5-6Winter

Driving...................................... 8-7Winter Driving.............................. 8-7Winter Tires............................... 9-39Wiper Blade Replacement......... 9-24Wipers

Rear Washer............................ 5-7

13-12

Documents

Captiva Manual